USM 35X Operating Manual

Ident-Nr. 48 001

Technical Reference and Operating Manual

USM 35X Unfold this page. You will find an overview of the USM 35X function groups and operator’s controls. This information will help you to quickly find your way through the operating manual.

This issue 01, 04/2005 applies to the following software versions:

with Data Logger option: V.01.21.3x

V.01.20.3x

USM 35X S


V.01.10.3x

USM 35X DAC


V.01.00.3x

USM 35X

Subject to change without notice.

Contents First operation level Changing the operation level:

Selecting the function group: Selecting the function: BASE

PULS

RECV

aGAT

bGAT

TRIG

MEM

DATA

AWS or

Second operation level

CAL

REF*

H Notes:

Third operation level

0-2

As a standard feature, the function group REF can be changed over to the function group AWS. With the USM 35X DAC, there is also the additional function group DAC/ JDAC; with the USM 35X S, the function groups DAC/JDAC and DGS are available. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

MEAS

MSEL

LCD

CFG1

CFG2

The character > after a function indicates a double assignment.

Status symbols

Key functions

Symbol

Key

Description

* DGS or * DAC/ JDAC

Function

*

Display memory is enabled (freeze), display is stored.

Switching the unit on and off

!

Data transfer active, printing or remote control

Step size for gain setting

B

Battery indicator; appears with low battery charge, batteries must be charged.

F

TOF is set to flank.

P

TOF is set to peak.

J

TOF is set to jflank.

Enlarged echo display over the entire screen

T

T-CORR (transfer correction) function is active

Printing or transferring data

R

Reference echo has been recorded

A

ATT-OBJ/ATT-REF function (sound attenuation is active)

LED Symbol

A R D

Storage (freezing) of screen display

Recording measured values, saving data

Changing the operation level Description

Gate alarm Function REJECT is active Function DUAL (pulser-receiver separation) is active

Selecting the function group

Selecting the function

Contents

1 Introduction ........................................ 1-1 1.1 Safety information ..................................... 1-2 Batteries ...................................................... 1-2 Software ...................................................... 1-2 Defects/errors and exceptional stresses ..... 1-3 1.2 Important information on ultrasonic testing ...................................... 1-3 Preconditions for testing with ultrasonic test equipment ............................ 1-3 Operator training .......................................... 1-4 Technical test requirements ........................ 1-4 Limits of testing .......................................... 1-5 Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement ...... 1-5 Effect of the test object’s material .............. 1-5 Effect of temperature variations .................. 1-6 Measurement of remaining wall thickness .................................................... 1-6 Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws ..................... 1-6 Flaw boundary method ................................ 1-6 Echo display comparison method ............... 1-7 Krautkramer USM 35X

1.3 The USM 35X family .................................. 1-8 The different instrument versions ................ 1-8 Special features .......................................... 1-9 1.4 How to use this manual .......................... 1-10 1.5 Layout and presentation in this manual ..................................................... 1-11 Attention and Note symbols ...................... 1-11 Listings ..................................................... 1-11 Operating steps ......................................... 1-11

2 Standard package and accessories ........................................ 2-1 2.1 Standard package ..................................... 2-3 2.2 Recommended accessories ..................... 2-5

Issue 01, 04/2005

0-1

Contents

1 Introduction ........................................ 1-1 1.1 Safety information ..................................... 1-2 Batteries ...................................................... 1-2 Software ...................................................... 1-2 Defects/errors and exceptional stresses ..... 1-3 1.2 Important information on ultrasonic testing ...................................... 1-3 Preconditions for testing with ultrasonic test equipment ............................ 1-3 Operator training .......................................... 1-4 Technical test requirements ........................ 1-4 Limits of testing .......................................... 1-5 Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement ...... 1-5 Effect of the test object’s material .............. 1-5 Effect of temperature variations .................. 1-6 Measurement of remaining wall thickness .................................................... 1-6 Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws ..................... 1-6 Flaw boundary method ................................ 1-6 Echo display comparison method ............... 1-7 Krautkramer USM 35X

1.3 The USM 35X family .................................. 1-8 The different instrument versions ................ 1-8 Special features .......................................... 1-9 1.4 How to use this manual .......................... 1-10 1.5 Layout and presentation in this manual ..................................................... 1-11 Attention and Note symbols ...................... 1-11 Listings ..................................................... 1-11 Operating steps ......................................... 1-11

2 Standard package and accessories ........................................ 2-1 2.1 Standard package ..................................... 2-3 2.2 Recommended accessories ..................... 2-5

Issue 01, 04/2005

0-1

Contents

3 Initial start-up ...................................... 3-1 3.1 Power supply ............................................. 3-2 Operation using the power supply unit ........ 3-2 Operation using batteries ............................ 3-3 Charging the batteries ................................. 3-5 3.2 Connecting a probe .................................. 3-7 3.3 Starting the USM 35X ................................ 3-8 Switching on ................................................ 3-8 Reset .......................................................... 3-8 Information lines in the startup screen ........ 3-8

4 Principles of operation ...................... 4-1 4.1 Operator’s controls ................................... 4-2 4.2 Screen display ........................................... 4-3 Functions on the display ............................. 4-4 Other displays ............................................. 4-5

0-2

4.3 Keys and rotary knobs .............................. 4-6 Function keys ............................................. 4-6 On/Off key .................................................. 4-6 Special keys ............................................... 4-7 Rotary knobs ............................................... 4-8 4.4 Operational concept .................................. 4-8 Setting the functions ................................... 4-9 4.5 Important basic settings ......................... 4-10 Selecting the language .............................. 4-10 Selecting units .......................................... 4-11 Setting the date ......................................... 4-12 Setting the time ......................................... 4-13 4.6 Basic settings of the display .................. 4-14 Selecting the color scheme ....................... 4-14 Setting the lighting .................................... 4-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents

3 Initial start-up ...................................... 3-1 3.1 Power supply ............................................. 3-2 Operation using the power supply unit ........ 3-2 Operation using batteries ............................ 3-3 Charging the batteries ................................. 3-5 3.2 Connecting a probe .................................. 3-7 3.3 Starting the USM 35X ................................ 3-8 Switching on ................................................ 3-8 Reset .......................................................... 3-8 Information lines in the startup screen ........ 3-8

4 Principles of operation ...................... 4-1 4.1 Operator’s controls ................................... 4-2 4.2 Screen display ........................................... 4-3 Functions on the display ............................. 4-4 Other displays ............................................. 4-5

0-2

4.3 Keys and rotary knobs .............................. 4-6 Function keys ............................................. 4-6 On/Off key .................................................. 4-6 Special keys ............................................... 4-7 Rotary knobs ............................................... 4-8 4.4 Operational concept .................................. 4-8 Setting the functions ................................... 4-9 4.5 Important basic settings ......................... 4-10 Selecting the language .............................. 4-10 Selecting units .......................................... 4-11 Setting the date ......................................... 4-12 Setting the time ......................................... 4-13 4.6 Basic settings of the display .................. 4-14 Selecting the color scheme ....................... 4-14 Setting the lighting .................................... 4-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents

5 Operation ............................................ 5-1 5.1 Overview of the functions ......................... 5-2 Function groups first operating level ........... 5-3 Function groups second operating level ...... 5-3 Function groups third operating level .......... 5-4 5.2 Setting the gain ......................................... 5-5 Defining the dB incrementation for gain ...... 5-5 5.3 Adjusting the display range (function group BASE) .............................. 5-6 RANGE (Display range) .............................. 5-6 MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ........................... 5-7 D-DELAY (Display starting point) ................ 5-7 P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................... 5-8 5.4 Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS) .............................. 5-9 DAMPING (Probe matching) ....................... 5-9 POWER (Intensity) ................................... 5-10 DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation) ............ 5-10 PRF-MOD (Pulse repetition frequency) ..... 5-11 Krautkramer USM 35X

5.5 Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV) ............................ 5-11 FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ............. 5-12 dBSTEP .................................................... 5-12 REJECT .................................................... 5-12 FREQU (Frequency range) ........................ 5-13 RECTIFY (Rectification) ............................ 5-13 5.6 Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT) ......... 5-14 Tasks of the gates ..................................... 5-14 aLOGIC/bLOGIC (Evaluation logic of the gates) .................................................. 5-15 aSTART/bSTART (Starting points of the gates) .................................................. 5-16 aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) ...... 5-16 aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and measurement threshold of the gates) ........ 5-16

Issue 01, 04/2005

0-3

Contents

5 Operation ............................................ 5-1 5.1 Overview of the functions ......................... 5-2 Function groups first operating level ........... 5-3 Function groups second operating level ...... 5-3 Function groups third operating level .......... 5-4 5.2 Setting the gain ......................................... 5-5 Defining the dB incrementation for gain ...... 5-5 5.3 Adjusting the display range (function group BASE) .............................. 5-6 RANGE (Display range) .............................. 5-6 MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ........................... 5-7 D-DELAY (Display starting point) ................ 5-7 P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................... 5-8 5.4 Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS) .............................. 5-9 DAMPING (Probe matching) ....................... 5-9 POWER (Intensity) ................................... 5-10 DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation) ............ 5-10 PRF-MOD (Pulse repetition frequency) ..... 5-11 Krautkramer USM 35X

5.5 Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV) ............................ 5-11 FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ............. 5-12 dBSTEP .................................................... 5-12 REJECT .................................................... 5-12 FREQU (Frequency range) ........................ 5-13 RECTIFY (Rectification) ............................ 5-13 5.6 Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT) ......... 5-14 Tasks of the gates ..................................... 5-14 aLOGIC/bLOGIC (Evaluation logic of the gates) .................................................. 5-15 aSTART/bSTART (Starting points of the gates) .................................................. 5-16 aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) ...... 5-16 aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and measurement threshold of the gates) ........ 5-16

Issue 01, 04/2005

0-3

Contents 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X ......................... 5-17 Calibrating the display range ..................... 5-17 Choosing the measuring point ................... 5-17 Calibration with straight- and angle-beam probes .................................... 5-18 Calibration with dual-element (TR) probes ....................................................... 5-21 5.8 Measuring ................................................ 5-23 General notes ............................................ 5-23 5.9 Measurement of dB difference (function group REF) .............................. 5-25 Recording a reference echo ...................... 5-26 Deleting a reference echo ......................... 5-26 Echo comparison ...................................... 5-27 5.10 Classification of welds (function group AWS) .............................. 5-28 Rating of welds according to AWS ............ 5-28 5.11 Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) ............................. 5-31

0-4

ANGLE (Angle of incidence) ................... 5-32 X-VALUE (X-value of the probe) ................ 5-32 COLOR ..................................................... 5-33 THICKNE (Material thickness) .................. 5-33 DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test object) ....................................................... 5-33 5.12 Data saving (function group MEM) ............................. 5-34 Storing a data set ...................................... 5-35 Deleting a data set .................................... 5-35 Deleting all data set .................................. 5-36 Recalling a stored data set ....................... 5-36 5.13 Dataset management (function group DATA) ............................. 5-38 TESTINF (Storing additional information) ............................................... 5-39 PREVIEW (Dataset preview) .................... 5-41 DIR (Dataset directory) ............................. 5-42 SETTING (Function list) ............................ 5-42

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X ......................... 5-17 Calibrating the display range ..................... 5-17 Choosing the measuring point ................... 5-17 Calibration with straight- and angle-beam probes .................................... 5-18 Calibration with dual-element (TR) probes ....................................................... 5-21 5.8 Measuring ................................................ 5-23 General notes ............................................ 5-23 5.9 Measurement of dB difference (function group REF) .............................. 5-25 Recording a reference echo ...................... 5-26 Deleting a reference echo ......................... 5-26 Echo comparison ...................................... 5-27 5.10 Classification of welds (function group AWS) .............................. 5-28 Rating of welds according to AWS ............ 5-28 5.11 Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) ............................. 5-31

0-4

ANGLE (Angle of incidence) ................... 5-32 X-VALUE (X-value of the probe) ................ 5-32 COLOR ..................................................... 5-33 THICKNE (Material thickness) .................. 5-33 DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test object) ....................................................... 5-33 5.12 Data saving (function group MEM) ............................. 5-34 Storing a data set ...................................... 5-35 Deleting a data set .................................... 5-35 Deleting all data set .................................. 5-36 Recalling a stored data set ....................... 5-36 5.13 Dataset management (function group DATA) ............................. 5-38 TESTINF (Storing additional information) ............................................... 5-39 PREVIEW (Dataset preview) .................... 5-41 DIR (Dataset directory) ............................. 5-42 SETTING (Function list) ............................ 5-42

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents 5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for a test application ............................................... 5-43 TOF (Selecting the measuring point) ......... 5-44 S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ......... 5-46 MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) ...................... 5-48 A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) ..................... 5-48 Configuring the measurement line ............. 5-49 Setting the display .................................... 5-50 FILLED (Echo display mode) .................... 5-51 VGA .......................................................... 5-51 SCHEME .................................................. 5-51 LIGHT (LCD backlight) .............................. 5-52 SCALE (Configuring the measurement line) ........................................................... 5-52 5.15 General configuration ............................. 5-53 DIALOG (Selecting the language) ............. 5-53 UNIT (Selecting units of measurement) .... 5-54 BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission) ........ 5-55 PRINTER (Printer for test report) .............. 5-55 COPYMOD (Assignment of the Krautkramer USM 35X

TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date) .... 5-56 ANAMOD .................................................. 5-57 HORN ........................................................ 5-58 EVAMOD (Echo evaluation) ...................... 5-58 5.16 Other functions with special keys .......... 5-59 Freeze ....................................................... 5-59 Zooming the echo display ......................... 5-59 The key

............................................... 5-59

5.17 Status symbols and LEDs ...................... 5-60 Status symbols ......................................... 5-60 LEDs ......................................................... 5-60 5.18 Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) ........ 5-61 DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) ............... 5-62 DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-63 T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-64 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-65 Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-65

key) ... 5-55 Issue 01, 04/2005

0-5

Contents 5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for a test application ............................................... 5-43 TOF (Selecting the measuring point) ......... 5-44 S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ......... 5-46 MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) ...................... 5-48 A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) ..................... 5-48 Configuring the measurement line ............. 5-49 Setting the display .................................... 5-50 FILLED (Echo display mode) .................... 5-51 VGA .......................................................... 5-51 SCHEME .................................................. 5-51 LIGHT (LCD backlight) .............................. 5-52 SCALE (Configuring the measurement line) ........................................................... 5-52 5.15 General configuration ............................. 5-53 DIALOG (Selecting the language) ............. 5-53 UNIT (Selecting units of measurement) .... 5-54 BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission) ........ 5-55 PRINTER (Printer for test report) .............. 5-55 COPYMOD (Assignment of the Krautkramer USM 35X

TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date) .... 5-56 ANAMOD .................................................. 5-57 HORN ........................................................ 5-58 EVAMOD (Echo evaluation) ...................... 5-58 5.16 Other functions with special keys .......... 5-59 Freeze ....................................................... 5-59 Zooming the echo display ......................... 5-59 The key

............................................... 5-59

5.17 Status symbols and LEDs ...................... 5-60 Status symbols ......................................... 5-60 LEDs ......................................................... 5-60 5.18 Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) ........ 5-61 DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) ............... 5-62 DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-63 T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-64 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-65 Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-65

key) ... 5-55 Issue 01, 04/2005

0-5

Contents 5.19 Distance-amplitude curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) .......................................... 5-66 DACMOD (Activating DAC according to JIS) ....................................................... 5-67 DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-68 BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) .... 5-70 T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-70 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-70 Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-71 5.20 Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) ...................... 5-71 Measuring with DGS ................................. 5-71 Selecting the DGS mode .......................... 5-73 Default settings for the DGS measurement ............................................ 5-73 Recording the reference echo and displaying the DGS curve ......................... 5-75 Evaluation of reflectors ............................. 5-76 Transfer correction ..................................... 5-78 Sound attenuation ..................................... 5-78 0-6

Locks, error messages ............................. 5-81 Validity of the DGS method ....................... 5-81

6 Documentation .................................. 6-1 6.1 Printing data .............................................. 6-2 Preparing the printer .................................... 6-2 Preparing the USM 35X .............................. 6-2 Printing ........................................................ 6-3 6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC ................. 6-4

7 Maintenance and care ....................... 7-1 7.1 Care of the instrument .............................. 7-2 7.2 Care of the batteries .................................. 7-3 Care of the batteries .................................... 7-3 Charging the batteries ................................. 7-3 How to handle alkaline batteries .................. 7-4 7.3 Maintenance .............................................. 7-5

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents 5.19 Distance-amplitude curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) .......................................... 5-66 DACMOD (Activating DAC according to JIS) ....................................................... 5-67 DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-68 BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) .... 5-70 T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-70 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-70 Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-71 5.20 Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) ...................... 5-71 Measuring with DGS ................................. 5-71 Selecting the DGS mode .......................... 5-73 Default settings for the DGS measurement ............................................ 5-73 Recording the reference echo and displaying the DGS curve ......................... 5-75 Evaluation of reflectors ............................. 5-76 Transfer correction ..................................... 5-78 Sound attenuation ..................................... 5-78 0-6

Locks, error messages ............................. 5-81 Validity of the DGS method ....................... 5-81

6 Documentation .................................. 6-1 6.1 Printing data .............................................. 6-2 Preparing the printer .................................... 6-2 Preparing the USM 35X .............................. 6-2 Printing ........................................................ 6-3 6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC ................. 6-4

7 Maintenance and care ....................... 7-1 7.1 Care of the instrument .............................. 7-2 7.2 Care of the batteries .................................. 7-3 Care of the batteries .................................... 7-3 Charging the batteries ................................. 7-3 How to handle alkaline batteries .................. 7-4 7.3 Maintenance .............................................. 7-5

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents 7.4 Recycling ................................................... 7-6 General view of the device .......................... 7-6 Materials for separate disposal ................... 7-8 Further materials and components ........... 7-10 Recycling data of master device ............... 7-12

8.6 Remote control .......................................... 8-9 Syntax and timing ..................................... 8-11 Functions and remote control codes ......... 8-17 Other remote control codes ....................... 8-24 Control codes for the rotary knobs/ function keys ............................................ 8-26

8 Interfaces and peripherals ................ 8-1 8.1 Interfaces ................................................... 8-2 8.2 I/O interface ............................................... 8-4 Contact assignment of the LEMO-1-B socket ....................................... 8-5

9 Appendix ............................................ 9-1 9.1 Function directory ..................................... 9-2 9.2 EC declaration of conformity ................... 9-7 9.3 Manufacturer/Service addresses .............. 9-8

8.3 RS 232 interface ........................................ 8-6 Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket ... 8-6

9.4 Spare parts list ........................................ 9-10

8.4 RGB interface ............................................. 8-7

10 Changes ........................................... 10-1

8.5 Data exchange ........................................... 8-8 Connecting a printer or a PC ....................... 8-8 Activation of serial communication ............. 8-8 Printing data ................................................ 8-9

Krautkramer USM 35X

11 Index ................................................. 11-1 Technical Specifications according to EN 12668-1

Issue 01, 04/2005

0-7

Contents 7.4 Recycling ................................................... 7-6 General view of the device .......................... 7-6 Materials for separate disposal ................... 7-8 Further materials and components ........... 7-10 Recycling data of master device ............... 7-12

8.6 Remote control .......................................... 8-9 Syntax and timing ..................................... 8-11 Functions and remote control codes ......... 8-17 Other remote control codes ....................... 8-24 Control codes for the rotary knobs/ function keys ............................................ 8-26

8 Interfaces and peripherals ................ 8-1 8.1 Interfaces ................................................... 8-2 8.2 I/O interface ............................................... 8-4 Contact assignment of the LEMO-1-B socket ....................................... 8-5

9 Appendix ............................................ 9-1 9.1 Function directory ..................................... 9-2 9.2 EC declaration of conformity ................... 9-7 9.3 Manufacturer/Service addresses .............. 9-8

8.3 RS 232 interface ........................................ 8-6 Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket ... 8-6

9.4 Spare parts list ........................................ 9-10

8.4 RGB interface ............................................. 8-7

10 Changes ........................................... 10-1

8.5 Data exchange ........................................... 8-8 Connecting a printer or a PC ....................... 8-8 Activation of serial communication ............. 8-8 Printing data ................................................ 8-9

Krautkramer USM 35X

11 Index ................................................. 11-1 Technical Specifications according to EN 12668-1

Issue 01, 04/2005

0-7

0-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

0-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-1

Introduction

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1

1

1-1

Introduction

Safety information

1.1 Safety information

Batteries

The USM 35X has been designed and tested according to DIN EN 61 010 Part 1, 2002, Safety requirements for electrical measuring, control and lab equipment, and was technically in perfectly safe and faultless condition when leaving the manufacturing works. In order to maintain this condition and to ensure a safe operation, you should urgently read the following safety information before putting the instrument into operation.

A Attention: The USM 35X is an instrument for materials testing. Any use for medical applications or other purposes is not allowed! The USM 35X may only be used in industrial environments! The USM 35X is waterproof according to IP 66. The USM 35X can be operated with batteries or a power supply unit. The power supply unit has the electrical safety class II. 1-2

For the battery operation of the USM 35X, we recommend the use of a lithium-ion battery. The operation using alkaline batteries, NiMH or NiCad cells is likewise possible. You should only use the products recommended by us for the battery operation. You can charge the lithium-ion battery within the instrument itself or in an external battery charger. If you want to use NiMH or NiCad cells, you have to charge them in an external battery charger. As soon as you connect the power supply unit to the USM 35X, the battery power supply is interrupted. If a lithium-ion battery is inserted, the charging process starts automatically when you connect the instrument to the mains supply. Please refer to chapter 3.1 on power supply, and to chapter 7 on how to handle batteries.

Software According to the current state of the art, software is never completely free from errors. Before using any software-controlled test equipment, please make sure

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction

Safety information

1.1 Safety information

Batteries

The USM 35X has been designed and tested according to DIN EN 61 010 Part 1, 2002, Safety requirements for electrical measuring, control and lab equipment, and was technically in perfectly safe and faultless condition when leaving the manufacturing works. In order to maintain this condition and to ensure a safe operation, you should urgently read the following safety information before putting the instrument into operation.

A Attention: The USM 35X is an instrument for materials testing. Any use for medical applications or other purposes is not allowed! The USM 35X may only be used in industrial environments! The USM 35X is waterproof according to IP 66. The USM 35X can be operated with batteries or a power supply unit. The power supply unit has the electrical safety class II. 1-2

Krautkramer USM 35X

For the battery operation of the USM 35X, we recommend the use of a lithium-ion battery. The operation using alkaline batteries, NiMH or NiCad cells is likewise possible. You should only use the products recommended by us for the battery operation. You can charge the lithium-ion battery within the instrument itself or in an external battery charger. If you want to use NiMH or NiCad cells, you have to charge them in an external battery charger. As soon as you connect the power supply unit to the USM 35X, the battery power supply is interrupted. If a lithium-ion battery is inserted, the charging process starts automatically when you connect the instrument to the mains supply. Please refer to chapter 3.1 on power supply, and to chapter 7 on how to handle batteries.

Software According to the current state of the art, software is never completely free from errors. Before using any software-controlled test equipment, please make sure

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction

Safety information

that the required functions operate perfectly in the intended combination. If you have any questions about the use of your test equipment, please contact your nearest representative of GE Inspection Technologies.

Defects/errors and exceptional stresses If you have reason to believe that a safe operation of your USM 35X is no longer possible, you have to disconnect the instrument and secure it against unintentional reconnection. Remove the batteries if necessary. A safe operation is e.g. no longer possible • if the instrument shows visible damages, • if the instrument no longer operates perfectly, • after prolonged storage under adverse conditions (e.g. exceptional temperatures and/or especially high air humidity, or corrosive environmental conditions), • after being subjected to heavy stresses during transportation.

1.2 Important information on ultrasonic testing Please read the following information before using your USM 35X. It is important that you understand and observe this information to avoid any operator errors that might lead to false test results. This could result in personal injuries or damages to property.

Preconditions for testing with ultrasonic test equipment This operating manual contains essential information on how to operate your test equipment. In addition, there are a number of factors which affect the test results. A description of these factors would go beyond the scope of an operating manual. The following list therefore only mentions the three most important conditions for a safe and reliable ultrasonic inspection: • the operator training • the knowledge of special technical test requirements and limits • the choice of appropriate test equipment.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-3

Introduction

Safety information

that the required functions operate perfectly in the intended combination. If you have any questions about the use of your test equipment, please contact your nearest representative of GE Inspection Technologies.

Defects/errors and exceptional stresses If you have reason to believe that a safe operation of your USM 35X is no longer possible, you have to disconnect the instrument and secure it against unintentional reconnection. Remove the batteries if necessary. A safe operation is e.g. no longer possible • if the instrument shows visible damages, • if the instrument no longer operates perfectly, • after prolonged storage under adverse conditions (e.g. exceptional temperatures and/or especially high air humidity, or corrosive environmental conditions), • after being subjected to heavy stresses during transportation.

1.2 Important information on ultrasonic testing Please read the following information before using your USM 35X. It is important that you understand and observe this information to avoid any operator errors that might lead to false test results. This could result in personal injuries or damages to property.

Preconditions for testing with ultrasonic test equipment This operating manual contains essential information on how to operate your test equipment. In addition, there are a number of factors which affect the test results. A description of these factors would go beyond the scope of an operating manual. The following list therefore only mentions the three most important conditions for a safe and reliable ultrasonic inspection: • the operator training • the knowledge of special technical test requirements and limits • the choice of appropriate test equipment.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-3

Introduction

Important information on ultrasonic testing

Operator training

Technical test requirements

The operation of an ultrasonic test device requires a proper training in ultrasonic test methods.

Every ultrasonic test is subject to specific technical test requirements. The most important ones are:

A proper training comprises for example adequate knowledge of:

• the definition of the scope of inspection

• the theory of sound propagation

• the consideration of material properties

• the effects of sound velocity in the test material

• the determination of limits for recording and evaluation.

• the choice of the appropriate test method

• the behavior of the sound wave at interfaces between different materials • the propagation of the sound beam • the influence of sound attenuation in the test object and the influence of surface quality of the test object. Lack of such knowledge could lead to false test results with unforeseeable consequences. You can contact for example NDT societies or organizations in your country (DGZfP in Germany; ASNT in the USA), or also GE Inspection Technologies, for information concerning existing possibilities for the training of ultrasonic inspectors as well as on the qualifications and certificates that can finally be obtained. 1-4

It is the task of those with overall responsibility for testing to ensure that the inspector is fully informed about these requirements. The best basis for such information is experience with identical test objects. It is also essential that the relevant test specifications be clearly and completely understood by the inspector. GE Inspection Technologies regularly holds specialized training courses in the field of ultrasonic testing. The scheduled dates for these courses will be given to you on request.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction

Krautkramer USM 35X


Operator training

Technical test requirements

The operation of an ultrasonic test device requires a proper training in ultrasonic test methods.

Every ultrasonic test is subject to specific technical test requirements. The most important ones are:

A proper training comprises for example adequate knowledge of:

• the definition of the scope of inspection

• the theory of sound propagation

• the consideration of material properties

• the effects of sound velocity in the test material

• the determination of limits for recording and evaluation.

• the choice of the appropriate test method

• the behavior of the sound wave at interfaces between different materials • the propagation of the sound beam • the influence of sound attenuation in the test object and the influence of surface quality of the test object. Lack of such knowledge could lead to false test results with unforeseeable consequences. You can contact for example NDT societies or organizations in your country (DGZfP in Germany; ASNT in the USA), or also GE Inspection Technologies, for information concerning existing possibilities for the training of ultrasonic inspectors as well as on the qualifications and certificates that can finally be obtained. 1-4

It is the task of those with overall responsibility for testing to ensure that the inspector is fully informed about these requirements. The best basis for such information is experience with identical test objects. It is also essential that the relevant test specifications be clearly and completely understood by the inspector. GE Inspection Technologies regularly holds specialized training courses in the field of ultrasonic testing. The scheduled dates for these courses will be given to you on request.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction


Limits of testing The information obtained from ultrasonic tests only refers to those parts of the test object which are covered by the sound beam of the probe used. Any conclusions from the tested parts to be applied to the untested parts of the test object should be made with extreme caution. Such conclusions are generally only possible in cases where extensive experience and proven methods of statistical data acquisition are available. The sound beam can be completely reflected from boundary surfaces within the test object so that flaws and reflection points lying deeper remain undetected. It is therefore important to make sure that all areas to be tested in the test object are covered by the sound beam.

Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement All ultrasonic wall thickness measurements are based on a time-of-flight measurement. Accurate measurement results require a constant sound velocity in the test object. In test objects made of steel, even with Krautkramer USM 35X

varying alloying constituents, this condition is mostly fulfilled. The variation in sound velocity is so slight that it is only of importance for high-precision measurements. In other materials, e.g. nonferrous metals or plastics, the sound velocity variations may be even larger and thus affect the measuring accuracy.

Effect of the test object’s material If the test object’s material is not homogeneous, the sound may propagate at different sound velocities in different parts of the test objects. An average sound velocity should then be taken into account for the range calibration. This is achieved by means of a reference block whose sound velocity corresponds to the average sound velocity of the test object. If substantial sound velocity variations are to be expected, then the instrument calibration should be readjusted to the actual sound velocity values at shorter time intervals. Failure to do so may lead to false thickness readings.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction


Limits of testing The information obtained from ultrasonic tests only refers to those parts of the test object which are covered by the sound beam of the probe used. Any conclusions from the tested parts to be applied to the untested parts of the test object should be made with extreme caution. Such conclusions are generally only possible in cases where extensive experience and proven methods of statistical data acquisition are available. The sound beam can be completely reflected from boundary surfaces within the test object so that flaws and reflection points lying deeper remain undetected. It is therefore important to make sure that all areas to be tested in the test object are covered by the sound beam.

Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement All ultrasonic wall thickness measurements are based on a time-of-flight measurement. Accurate measurement results require a constant sound velocity in the test object. In test objects made of steel, even with Krautkramer USM 35X

1-5

varying alloying constituents, this condition is mostly fulfilled. The variation in sound velocity is so slight that it is only of importance for high-precision measurements. In other materials, e.g. nonferrous metals or plastics, the sound velocity variations may be even larger and thus affect the measuring accuracy.

Effect of the test object’s material If the test object’s material is not homogeneous, the sound may propagate at different sound velocities in different parts of the test objects. An average sound velocity should then be taken into account for the range calibration. This is achieved by means of a reference block whose sound velocity corresponds to the average sound velocity of the test object. If substantial sound velocity variations are to be expected, then the instrument calibration should be readjusted to the actual sound velocity values at shorter time intervals. Failure to do so may lead to false thickness readings.

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-5

Introduction


Effect of temperature variations

Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws

The sound velocity within the test object also varies as a function of the material’s temperature. This can cause appreciable errors in measurements if the instrument has been calibrated on a cold reference block and is then used on a warm or hot test object. Such measurement errors can be avoided either by warming the reference block to the same temperature before calibrating, or by using a correction factor obtained from tables.

In present-day test practice, there are basically two different methods of flaw evaluation:

Measurement of remaining wall thickness The measurement of the remaining wall thickness on plant components, e.g. pipes, tanks and reaction vessels of all types which are corroded or eroded from the inside, requires a perfectly suitable gauge and special care in handling the probe. The inspectors should always be informed about the corresponding nominal wall thicknesses and the likely amount of wall thickness losses.

1-6

If the diameter of the sound beam is smaller than the extent of the flaw, then the beam can be used to explore the boundaries of the flaw and thus determine its area. If, however, the diameter of the sound beam is larger than the size of the flaw, the maximum echo response from the flaw must be compared with the maximum echo response from an artificial flaw provided for comparison purposes.

Flaw boundary method The smaller the diameter of the probe’s sound beam, the more accurately the boundaries (and therefore the flaw area) can be determined by the flaw boundary method. If, however, the sound beam is relatively broad, the flaw area determined can substantially differ from the actual flaw area. Care should therefore be taken to select a probe which will give a sufficiently narrow beam at the position of the flaw.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction

Krautkramer USM 35X


Effect of temperature variations

Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws

The sound velocity within the test object also varies as a function of the material’s temperature. This can cause appreciable errors in measurements if the instrument has been calibrated on a cold reference block and is then used on a warm or hot test object. Such measurement errors can be avoided either by warming the reference block to the same temperature before calibrating, or by using a correction factor obtained from tables.

In present-day test practice, there are basically two different methods of flaw evaluation:

Measurement of remaining wall thickness The measurement of the remaining wall thickness on plant components, e.g. pipes, tanks and reaction vessels of all types which are corroded or eroded from the inside, requires a perfectly suitable gauge and special care in handling the probe. The inspectors should always be informed about the corresponding nominal wall thicknesses and the likely amount of wall thickness losses.

1-6

If the diameter of the sound beam is smaller than the extent of the flaw, then the beam can be used to explore the boundaries of the flaw and thus determine its area. If, however, the diameter of the sound beam is larger than the size of the flaw, the maximum echo response from the flaw must be compared with the maximum echo response from an artificial flaw provided for comparison purposes.

Flaw boundary method The smaller the diameter of the probe’s sound beam, the more accurately the boundaries (and therefore the flaw area) can be determined by the flaw boundary method. If, however, the sound beam is relatively broad, the flaw area determined can substantially differ from the actual flaw area. Care should therefore be taken to select a probe which will give a sufficiently narrow beam at the position of the flaw.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction


Echo display comparison method The echo from a small, natural flaw is usually smaller than the echo from an artificial comparison flaw, e.g. circular disc flaw of the same size. This is due, for instance, to the roughness of the surface of a natural flaw, or to the fact that the beam does not impinge on it at right angles. If this fact is not taken into account when evaluating natural flaws, there is a danger of underestimating their magnitude. In the case of very jagged or fissured flaws, e.g. shrink holes in castings, it may be that the sound scattering occurring at the boundary surface of the flaw is so strong that no echo at all is produced. In such cases, a different evaluation method should be chosen, e.g. use of the backwall echo attenuation in the evaluation. The distance sensitivity of the flaw echo plays an important part when testing large components. Attention should be paid here to choosing artificial comparison flaws which are as far as possible governed by the same ”distance laws” as the natural flaws to be evaluated. Krautkramer USM 35X

The ultrasonic wave is attenuated in any material. This sound attenuation is very low, e.g. in parts made of fine-grained steel, likewise in many small parts made of other materials. However, if the sound wave travels larger distances through the material, a high cumulative sound attenuation can result even with small attenuation coefficients. There is then a danger that echoes from natural flaws appear too small. For this reason, an estimate must always be made of the effects of attenuation on the evaluation result and taken into account if applicable. If the test object has a rough surface, part of the incident sound energy will be scattered at its surface and is not available for the test. The larger this initial scattering, the smaller the flaw echoes appear, and the more errors occur in the evaluation result. It is therefore important to take the effect of the test object’s surfaces on the height of the echo into account (transfer correction).

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction


Echo display comparison method The echo from a small, natural flaw is usually smaller than the echo from an artificial comparison flaw, e.g. circular disc flaw of the same size. This is due, for instance, to the roughness of the surface of a natural flaw, or to the fact that the beam does not impinge on it at right angles. If this fact is not taken into account when evaluating natural flaws, there is a danger of underestimating their magnitude. In the case of very jagged or fissured flaws, e.g. shrink holes in castings, it may be that the sound scattering occurring at the boundary surface of the flaw is so strong that no echo at all is produced. In such cases, a different evaluation method should be chosen, e.g. use of the backwall echo attenuation in the evaluation. The distance sensitivity of the flaw echo plays an important part when testing large components. Attention should be paid here to choosing artificial comparison flaws which are as far as possible governed by the same ”distance laws” as the natural flaws to be evaluated. Krautkramer USM 35X

1-7

The ultrasonic wave is attenuated in any material. This sound attenuation is very low, e.g. in parts made of fine-grained steel, likewise in many small parts made of other materials. However, if the sound wave travels larger distances through the material, a high cumulative sound attenuation can result even with small attenuation coefficients. There is then a danger that echoes from natural flaws appear too small. For this reason, an estimate must always be made of the effects of attenuation on the evaluation result and taken into account if applicable. If the test object has a rough surface, part of the incident sound energy will be scattered at its surface and is not available for the test. The larger this initial scattering, the smaller the flaw echoes appear, and the more errors occur in the evaluation result. It is therefore important to take the effect of the test object’s surfaces on the height of the echo into account (transfer correction).

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-7

Introduction

The USM 35X family

1.3 The USM 35X family

The different instrument versions

The USM 35X is a lightweight and compact ultrasonic flaw detector especially suitable for • locating and evaluating material defects, • measuring wall thicknesses, • saving and documenting test results. With its frequency range from 0.5 to 20 MHz and a maximum calibration range of 10 m (steel), the USM 35X is designed for use on large workpieces and in highresolution measurements.

The USM 35X is available in several versions which are desgined for different applications: • USM 35X Standard version for universal ultrasonic test applications. • USM 35X DAC The multiple DAC curves and time-corrected gain enable a field-oriented echo amplitude evaluation according to almost all international test specifications. • USM 35X S DGS evaluation mode in addition to multiple DAC curves and TCG. DGS curves are stored for all narrow-band singleelement probes; amplitude evaluation is carried out either in dB above DAC curve or equivalent reflector size (ERS). • Data Logger option This option is available for all USM 35X versions and is used for the recording and documentation of thickness readings.

1-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction

Krautkramer USM 35X

The USM 35X family

1.3 The USM 35X family

The different instrument versions

The USM 35X is a lightweight and compact ultrasonic flaw detector especially suitable for • locating and evaluating material defects, • measuring wall thicknesses, • saving and documenting test results. With its frequency range from 0.5 to 20 MHz and a maximum calibration range of 10 m (steel), the USM 35X is designed for use on large workpieces and in highresolution measurements.

The USM 35X is available in several versions which are desgined for different applications: • USM 35X Standard version for universal ultrasonic test applications. • USM 35X DAC The multiple DAC curves and time-corrected gain enable a field-oriented echo amplitude evaluation according to almost all international test specifications. • USM 35X S DGS evaluation mode in addition to multiple DAC curves and TCG. DGS curves are stored for all narrow-band singleelement probes; amplitude evaluation is carried out either in dB above DAC curve or equivalent reflector size (ERS). • Data Logger option This option is available for all USM 35X versions and is used for the recording and documentation of thickness readings.

1-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction

The USM 35X family

Special features • low weight (2.2 kg including lithium-ion battery) and compact size • waterproof instrument case with protection class IP 66 • long operating time (> 12 hours) by means of lithiumion battery with internal and external charging possibility

• VGA interface for the connection of an external monitor • color display of gates for an easier distinction • easily recognizable reflection geometry when using angle-beam probes by the variation of A-scan or background color at every deflection point • data memory: 800 data sets, including alphanumeric description, documentation possibility via a printer

• handy – equipped with a non-slip, ratcheting prop-up stand, also used as handle

• increased calibration range: up to 9999 mm (steel), depending on the frequency range

• rotary knobs for direct adjustment of gain as well as for changing the currently selected function

• semiautomatic two point calibration

• two independant gates for accurate wall thickness measurements from the workpiece surface up to the first echo, or between two backwall echoes, including measurement on coated workpieces with a resolution of 0.01 mm (up to 100 mm), referred to steel • magnify gate: spreading of the gate range over the entire screen width

• pulse repetition frequency variable in ten steps to avoid phantom echoes when testing large workpieces • choice of frequency range for the connected probe • signal display mode: full-wave rectification, positive half-wave or negative halv-wave and radio frequency • display of 4 readings plus 1 reading zoomed in the A-scan, user-configurable

• 5.7", 1/4 VGA-TFT color display to display the digitized signals (320 × 240 pixels, 115 × 86 mm )

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-9

Introduction

The USM 35X family

Special features • low weight (2.2 kg including lithium-ion battery) and compact size • waterproof instrument case with protection class IP 66 • long operating time (> 12 hours) by means of lithiumion battery with internal and external charging possibility

• VGA interface for the connection of an external monitor • color display of gates for an easier distinction • easily recognizable reflection geometry when using angle-beam probes by the variation of A-scan or background color at every deflection point • data memory: 800 data sets, including alphanumeric description, documentation possibility via a printer

• handy – equipped with a non-slip, ratcheting prop-up stand, also used as handle

• increased calibration range: up to 9999 mm (steel), depending on the frequency range

• rotary knobs for direct adjustment of gain as well as for changing the currently selected function

• semiautomatic two point calibration

• two independant gates for accurate wall thickness measurements from the workpiece surface up to the first echo, or between two backwall echoes, including measurement on coated workpieces with a resolution of 0.01 mm (up to 100 mm), referred to steel • magnify gate: spreading of the gate range over the entire screen width

• pulse repetition frequency variable in ten steps to avoid phantom echoes when testing large workpieces • choice of frequency range for the connected probe • signal display mode: full-wave rectification, positive half-wave or negative halv-wave and radio frequency • display of 4 readings plus 1 reading zoomed in the A-scan, user-configurable

• 5.7", 1/4 VGA-TFT color display to display the digitized signals (320 × 240 pixels, 115 × 86 mm )

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-9

Introduction

How to use this manual

1.4 How to use this manual The present operating manual applies to all instrument versions of the USM 35X. Differences in the functions or setting values are always marked. Before operating the USM 35X for the first time, it is absolutely necessary that you read the chapters 1, 3 and 4 of this manual. They will inform you about the necessary preparations of the instrument, give you a description of all keys and screen displays, and explain the operating principle.

The specifications/Technical Specifications according to EN 12668-1 for the USM 35X family can be found in the attachment at the end of this operating manual. The Data Logger option, which can be applied to all USM 35X versions, is described in a chapter of its own – at the end of the operating manual. All functions referring to the Data Logger and the tolerance monitor are described here. At the same time, the standard operating manual applies to all other functions.

In doing this, you will avoid any errors or failures of the instrument and be able to use the full range of instrument functions. You will find the latest changes to this operating manual in chapter 10 Changes. It describes corrections that have become necessary at short notice and have not yet been included in the general manual. If no corrections have become necessary, this chapter is empty.

1-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Introduction

Krautkramer USM 35X

How to use this manual

1.4 How to use this manual The present operating manual applies to all instrument versions of the USM 35X. Differences in the functions or setting values are always marked. Before operating the USM 35X for the first time, it is absolutely necessary that you read the chapters 1, 3 and 4 of this manual. They will inform you about the necessary preparations of the instrument, give you a description of all keys and screen displays, and explain the operating principle.

The specifications/Technical Specifications according to EN 12668-1 for the USM 35X family can be found in the attachment at the end of this operating manual. The Data Logger option, which can be applied to all USM 35X versions, is described in a chapter of its own – at the end of the operating manual. All functions referring to the Data Logger and the tolerance monitor are described here. At the same time, the standard operating manual applies to all other functions.

In doing this, you will avoid any errors or failures of the instrument and be able to use the full range of instrument functions. You will find the latest changes to this operating manual in chapter 10 Changes. It describes corrections that have become necessary at short notice and have not yet been included in the general manual. If no corrections have become necessary, this chapter is empty.

1-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction

Layout and presentation in this manual

1.5 Layout and presentation in this manual To make it easier for you to use this manual, all operating steps, notes, etc., are always presented in the same way. This will help you find individual pieces of information quickly.

Listings Listings are presented in the following form: • Variant A • Variant B • ...

Operating steps Attention and Note symbols

Operating steps appear as shown in the following example:

A Attention: The Attention symbol indicates peculiarities and special aspects in the operation which could affect the accuracy of the results.

– Loosen the two screws at the bottom. – Remove the cover. – ...

H Note: Note contains e.g. references to other chapters or special recommendations for a function.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-11

Introduction

Layout and presentation in this manual

1.5 Layout and presentation in this manual To make it easier for you to use this manual, all operating steps, notes, etc., are always presented in the same way. This will help you find individual pieces of information quickly.

Listings Listings are presented in the following form: • Variant A • Variant B • ...

Operating steps Attention and Note symbols

Operating steps appear as shown in the following example:

A Attention: The Attention symbol indicates peculiarities and special aspects in the operation which could affect the accuracy of the results.

– Loosen the two screws at the bottom. – Remove the cover. – ...

H Note: Note contains e.g. references to other chapters or special recommendations for a function.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

1-11

1-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

1-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Standard package and accessories

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

2

2-1

2

2-1

Standard package and accessories This chapter informs you about the standard package and the accessories available for the USM 35X. It describes • accessories included in the standard package, • recommended accessories.

2-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Standard package and accessories This chapter informs you about the standard package and the accessories available for the USM 35X. It describes • accessories included in the standard package, • recommended accessories.

2-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Standard package

2.1 Standard package Product code

Description

Order number

Ultrasonic testing kit consisting of: USM 35X

Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, basic version with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors or with BNC connectors

36 060 36 061

or USM 35X DAC

Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC version with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors or with BNC connectors

36 062 36 063

or USM 35X S

Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC/TCG and DGS evaluation with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors or with BNC connectors

Krautkramer USM 35X

36 064 36 065

Issue 01, 04/2005

2-3


Standard package

2.1 Standard package Product code

Description

Order number

Ultrasonic testing kit consisting of: USM 35X

Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, basic version with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors or with BNC connectors

36 060 36 061

or USM 35X DAC

Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC version with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors or with BNC connectors

36 062 36 063

or USM 35X S

Krautkramer USM 35X

Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC/TCG and DGS evaluation with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors or with BNC connectors

Issue 01, 04/2005

36 064 36 065

2-3


Standard package

Product code

Description

UM 30

Transport case AC power supply/battery charger Operating manual in English

2-4

Issue 01, 04/2005


35 654 102 163 48 001

Krautkramer USM 35X

Standard package

Product code

Description

UM 30

Transport case AC power supply/battery charger Operating manual in English

2-4

Order number

Issue 01, 04/2005

Order number 35 654 102 163 48 001

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recommended accessories

2.2 Recommended accessories Product code

Description

Order number

Operating manual in German

48 002

Operating manual in French

48 003

Operating manual in Spanish

48 004

Operating manual in Japanese

48 005

Operating manual in Chinese

48 006

LI-ION

Li-Ion battery NI2020, 10.8 V, 6.6 Ah

102 208

DR36

Battery charger for external charging of the Li-Ion battery

35 297

NCA 1-6

6 NiCd cells, 3 Ah (alternatively to Li-Ion)

25 810

Energy 16

Desk rapid charger for external charging of NiMH or NiCd cells

101 729

UM 32

Protection bag including neck strap

35 655

UD 20

PC cable, 25-pin (PC), 9-pin (instrument)

32 291

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

2-5



2.2 Recommended accessories Product code

Description

Order number

Operating manual in German

48 002

Operating manual in French

48 003

Operating manual in Spanish

48 004

Operating manual in Japanese

48 005

Operating manual in Chinese

48 006

LI-ION

Li-Ion battery NI2020, 10.8 V, 6.6 Ah

102 208

DR36

Battery charger for external charging of the Li-Ion battery

35 297

NCA 1-6

6 NiCd cells, 3 Ah (alternatively to Li-Ion)

25 810

Energy 16

Desk rapid charger for external charging of NiMH or NiCd cells

101 729

UM 32

Protection bag including neck strap

35 655

UD 20


32 291

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

2-5



Product code

Description

Order number

UD 31


34 943

UD 30

Seiko Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/9-pin (printer)

18 495

UD 32

Epson Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/25-pin (printer)

34 944

Adapter 25/9-pin for printer cable UD 19-1 on USM 35X

16 121

Serial-to-parallel printer cable (Patton Model 2029)

101 761

Adapter cable RS232 – USB

35 838

UM 25

Analog cable, 8-pin Lemo plug (instrument), open ended 35 268

UM 31

VGA adapter for connection of an external monitor

35 653

UM 28 D

Option: Data Logger (retrofittable to all versions)

35 800

UM 200 W

UltraDOC data communication software for USM

35 024

U 100 W

UltraDOC

33 829

PZ-USM

Calibration certificate according to EN 12668-1

35 263

Epson LX

Matrix printer for mains operation, single sheet and continuous stationary

17 995

Thermal printer for mains and battery operation

17 993

Seiko DPU 2-6

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X


Product code

Description

Order number

UD 31


34 943

UD 30

Seiko Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/9-pin (printer)

18 495

UD 32

Epson Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/25-pin (printer)

34 944

Adapter 25/9-pin for printer cable UD 19-1 on USM 35X

16 121

Serial-to-parallel printer cable (Patton Model 2029) Adapter cable RS232 – USB

35 838

UM 25

Analog cable, 8-pin Lemo plug (instrument), open ended 35 268

UM 31

VGA adapter for connection of an external monitor

35 653

UM 28 D

Option: Data Logger (retrofittable to all versions)

35 800

UM 200 W

UltraDOC data communication software for USM

35 024

U 100 W

UltraDOC

33 829

PZ-USM

Calibration certificate according to EN 12668-1

35 263

Epson LX

Matrix printer for mains operation, single sheet and continuous stationary

17 995

Thermal printer for mains and battery operation

17 993

Seiko DPU 2-6

101 761

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-1

Initial start-up

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

3

3

3-1

Initial start-up

Power supply

3.1 Power supply

Connecting the instrument

The USM 35X can be operated with an external power pack adaptor or with batteries.

Connect the USM 35X to the mains socket-outlet using the corresponding power supply unit. The plug receptacle is at the top left of the USM 35X.

You can connect the USM 35X to the mains supply system even if it carries batteries. The battery power is then automatically interrupted.

– Push the Lemo plug of the power supply unit into the plug receptacle until it snaps into place with a clearly audible click.

Operation using the power supply unit

Ð

Mains connection The power supply unit is delivered with two different power cables – for Euro and USA standard.

3-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Power supply

3.1 Power supply

Connecting the instrument

The USM 35X can be operated with an external power pack adaptor or with batteries.

Connect the USM 35X to the mains socket-outlet using the corresponding power supply unit. The plug receptacle is at the top left of the USM 35X.

You can connect the USM 35X to the mains supply system even if it carries batteries. The battery power is then automatically interrupted.

– Push the Lemo plug of the power supply unit into the plug receptacle until it snaps into place with a clearly audible click.

Operation using the power supply unit Mains connection

Ð

The power supply unit is delivered with two different power cables – for Euro and USA standard.

3-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Power supply

– When pulling off the Lemo plug, withdraw the metal bushing on the plug first in order to release the lock. The power supply unit is automatically set to any nominal voltage between 90 VAC and 240 VAC.

– Lift the lid off upward. To the right in the open battery compartment, you will see two springs and several connection pins.

Operation using batteries Use either a lithium-ion battery or 6 standard C-cells (NiCad, NiMH, or alkaline cells) for the battery operation. We recommend the use of a lithium-ion battery. It has a higher capacity and consequently ensures a longer operating time of the instrument. Inserting batteries The battery compartment is situated at the instrument back; the lid is fastened with 2 attachment screws. – Press the two attachment screws of the battery compartment downward in order to loosen them.

Krautkramer USM 35X

– Insert the battery into the battery compartment. To do this, first press the right side of the battery against the springs of the battery compartment. Make sure that the socket on the right side of the battery is connected with the connection pins in the battery compartment.

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-3

Initial start-up

Power supply

– When pulling off the Lemo plug, withdraw the metal bushing on the plug first in order to release the lock. The power supply unit is automatically set to any nominal voltage between 90 VAC and 240 VAC.

– Lift the lid off upward. To the right in the open battery compartment, you will see two springs and several connection pins.

Operation using batteries Use either a lithium-ion battery or 6 standard C-cells (NiCad, NiMH, or alkaline cells) for the battery operation. We recommend the use of a lithium-ion battery. It has a higher capacity and consequently ensures a longer operating time of the instrument. Inserting batteries The battery compartment is situated at the instrument back; the lid is fastened with 2 attachment screws. – Press the two attachment screws of the battery compartment downward in order to loosen them.

Krautkramer USM 35X

– Insert the battery into the battery compartment. To do this, first press the right side of the battery against the springs of the battery compartment. Make sure that the socket on the right side of the battery is connected with the connection pins in the battery compartment.

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-3

Initial start-up

Power supply

– Close the battery compartment and fasten the attachment screws. Checking the battery charge of lithium-ion batteries The lithium-ion battery is equipped with a battery charge indicator. The battery charge indicator is situated at the front right of the battery. Four LEDs indicate the charge level of battery. Check the battery charge before inserting the battery into the instrument. or – Insert the batteries into the battery compartment and check the right polarity.

The number of LEDs that are on has the following meaning: • 4 LEDs – battery charge 100 ... 76% • 3 LEDs – battery charge 75 ... 51% • 2 LEDs – battery charge 50 ... 26% • 1 LED – battery charge 25 ... 10% • 1 LED flashing – battery charge <10%

3-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Power supply

– Close the battery compartment and fasten the attachment screws. Checking the battery charge of lithium-ion batteries The lithium-ion battery is equipped with a battery charge indicator. The battery charge indicator is situated at the front right of the battery. Four LEDs indicate the charge level of battery. Check the battery charge before inserting the battery into the instrument. or – Insert the batteries into the battery compartment and check the right polarity.

The number of LEDs that are on has the following meaning: • 4 LEDs – battery charge 100 ... 76% • 3 LEDs – battery charge 75 ... 51% • 2 LEDs – battery charge 50 ... 26% • 1 LED – battery charge 25 ... 10% • 1 LED flashing – battery charge <10%

3-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Power supply

H Note: If the icon for low battery charge appears, you should urgently close your test job and exchange the batteries. You should take replacement batteries with you if you aim to carry out measurements on site.

Charging the batteries – Press the button PUSH at the front side of the battery. Four LEDs indicate the charge level of battery.

You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in the instrument or by means of an external battery charger. You always need an external battery charger to charge standard C-cells.

H Note: You can also check the battery charge even if the battery is located in the battery compartment of the instrument.

Internal charging Requirement:

Battery charge indicator

• Lithium-ion battery, order number 102 208

In the measurement line of the USM 35X, an inverted B appears if the battery charge is low.

• Power supply/charger unit, order number 102 163

Krautkramer USM 35X

If a battery is located in the instrument, the charging process is started automatically when you connect the plug-in power supply unit. You can carry out ultrasonic inspections and charge a battery at the same time.

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-5

Initial start-up

Power supply

H Note: If the icon for low battery charge appears, you should urgently close your test job and exchange the batteries. You should take replacement batteries with you if you aim to carry out measurements on site.

Charging the batteries – Press the button PUSH at the front side of the battery. Four LEDs indicate the charge level of battery.

You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in the instrument or by means of an external battery charger. You always need an external battery charger to charge standard C-cells.

H Note: You can also check the battery charge even if the battery is located in the battery compartment of the instrument.

Internal charging Requirement:

Battery charge indicator

• Lithium-ion battery, order number 102 208

In the measurement line of the USM 35X, an inverted B appears if the battery charge is low.

• Power supply/charger unit, order number 102 163

Krautkramer USM 35X

If a battery is located in the instrument, the charging process is started automatically when you connect the plug-in power supply unit. You can carry out ultrasonic inspections and charge a battery at the same time.

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-5

Initial start-up

Power supply

The charging time is 10 hours with a simultaneous ultrasonic inspection. If the instrument is not being used for ultrasonic inspections, the charging time is 8 hours. This charging time applies to ambient temperatures from 25 to 30 °C. Please take into consideration that the batteries are not charged to their full capacity at higher temperatures.

External charging Lithium-ion batteries can be charged by means of an external battery charger. We recommend the battery charger with the order number 35 297. To charge single NiCad or NiMH cells, you need the external desktop battery charger with the order number 101 729.

The LED display on the plug-in power supply unit indicates the status of the charging process. green LED

yellow LED

red LED

Status

off

flashing

off

no battery detected

off

flashing dark/bright

flashing bright/dark

charging at low power

off

on

off

quick charging phase 1



off


on

off

off

battery charged

off

off


temperature error, auto-reversible

off

off

on

csharging error, permanent

3-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Power supply

The charging time is 10 hours with a simultaneous ultrasonic inspection. If the instrument is not being used for ultrasonic inspections, the charging time is 8 hours. This charging time applies to ambient temperatures from 25 to 30 °C. Please take into consideration that the batteries are not charged to their full capacity at higher temperatures.

External charging Lithium-ion batteries can be charged by means of an external battery charger. We recommend the battery charger with the order number 35 297. To charge single NiCad or NiMH cells, you need the external desktop battery charger with the order number 101 729.

The LED display on the plug-in power supply unit indicates the status of the charging process. green LED

yellow LED

red LED

Status

off

flashing

off

no battery detected

off



charging at low power

off

on

off




off


on

off

off

battery charged

off

off


temperature error, auto-reversible

off

off

on

csharging error, permanent

3-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up

Connecting a probe

A Attention:

3.2 Connecting a probe To prepare the USM 35X for operation, you have to connect a probe to it. Any Krautkramer probe can be used for the USM 35X, provided the appropriate cable is available and the operating frequency is within an adequate range.

If this is not taken into account, the consequence would be a mismatching which may lead to considerable power losses or even to echo waveform distortions. Receiver

Transmitter

The USM 35X is available with the probe connectors LEMO-1-TRIAX or BNC. The probe is connected to the sockets at the top right on the instrument casing. Both connector sockets are equally suitable (connected in parallel) for connecting probes equipped with only one ultrasonic element (ultrasonic transducer) so that it does not matter which one of the two sockets is used. When connecting a dual-element (TR) probe (having one transmitter element and one receiver element), or two probes (of which one is transmitting and the other one receiving), attention should be paid to connecting the transmitter element to the right-hand socket (transmitter, marked with black circle at the rear of the instrument case) and the receiver element to the left-hand socket (receiver, marked with red circle). Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-7

Initial start-up

Connecting a probe

A Attention:

3.2 Connecting a probe To prepare the USM 35X for operation, you have to connect a probe to it. Any Krautkramer probe can be used for the USM 35X, provided the appropriate cable is available and the operating frequency is within an adequate range.

If this is not taken into account, the consequence would be a mismatching which may lead to considerable power losses or even to echo waveform distortions. Receiver

Transmitter

The USM 35X is available with the probe connectors LEMO-1-TRIAX or BNC. The probe is connected to the sockets at the top right on the instrument casing. Both connector sockets are equally suitable (connected in parallel) for connecting probes equipped with only one ultrasonic element (ultrasonic transducer) so that it does not matter which one of the two sockets is used. When connecting a dual-element (TR) probe (having one transmitter element and one receiver element), or two probes (of which one is transmitting and the other one receiving), attention should be paid to connecting the transmitter element to the right-hand socket (transmitter, marked with black circle at the rear of the instrument case) and the receiver element to the left-hand socket (receiver, marked with red circle). Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

3-7

Initial start-up

Starting the USM 35X

3.3 Starting the USM 35X

Reset

Switching on

If any functions can no longer be operated after a warm start, or if you want to reset the instrument to the basic setup, then you should carry out a cold start by simultaneously pressing the and the key.

To start the USM 35X, press the switch-on key

.

The start display of the USM 35X appears; here you will also see the current software version of the instrument. The instrument carries out a self-check and then switches over to stand-by mode.

The cold start message “Basic Initialization” is displayed. The instrument is initialized and reset to its basic setup (dialog language: English, for more details on how to select the language, please refer to chapter 4).

The settings of all function values and the basic settings (language and units) are the same as before switching-on of the instrument.

A Attention: All saved data are deleted.

Information lines in the startup screen You can enter two lines (each with up to 39 characters) for information purposes in the startup screen. For this use the remote function (codes I1 and I2, refer to chapter 8).

3-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Initial start-up

Krautkramer USM 35X

Starting the USM 35X

3.3 Starting the USM 35X

Reset

Switching on

If any functions can no longer be operated after a warm start, or if you want to reset the instrument to the basic setup, then you should carry out a cold start by simultaneously pressing the and the key.

To start the USM 35X, press the switch-on key

.

The start display of the USM 35X appears; here you will also see the current software version of the instrument. The instrument carries out a self-check and then switches over to stand-by mode.

The cold start message “Basic Initialization” is displayed. The instrument is initialized and reset to its basic setup (dialog language: English, for more details on how to select the language, please refer to chapter 4).

The settings of all function values and the basic settings (language and units) are the same as before switching-on of the instrument.

A Attention: All saved data are deleted.

Information lines in the startup screen You can enter two lines (each with up to 39 characters) for information purposes in the startup screen. For this use the remote function (codes I1 and I2, refer to chapter 8).

3-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4

4-1

4

4-1


Operator’s controls

4.1 Operator’s controls Special keys for special instrument functions

LED A: Gate alarm R: Rejection D: Dual on

Keys for selecting a function

Rotary knob for direct gain setting

Rotary knob for direct setting of the current function

Key for changing the operation level

On/Off key

Keys for selecting a function group

4-2

Issue 01, 04/2005


Operator’s controls

4.1 Operator’s controls Special keys for special instrument functions

Krautkramer USM 35X

LED A: Gate alarm R: Rejection D: Dual on

Keys for selecting a function

Rotary knob for direct gain setting

Rotary knob for direct setting of the current function

Key for changing the operation level

On/Off key

Keys for selecting a function group

4-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Screen display

4.2 Screen display The USM 35X has a digital screen for the display of • A-scan in the normal mode

• A-scan in the zoom mode The zoom mode is activated using the key

.

H Note: The screen display always shows the gain and the adjusted dB step value. All other functions are locked in zoom mode.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-3


Screen display

4.2 Screen display The USM 35X has a digital screen for the display of • A-scan in the normal mode

• A-scan in the zoom mode The zoom mode is activated using the key

.

H Note: The screen display always shows the gain and the adjusted dB step value. All other functions are locked in zoom mode.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-3


Screen display

Functions on the display The names of the five function groups are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The currently selected function group is highlighted.

Indicated at the right of the display, next to the A-scan, are the functions of the corresponding function group. The display of the functions disappears in the zoom mode.

4-4

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Screen display

Functions on the display The names of the five function groups are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The currently selected function group is highlighted.

Indicated at the right of the display, next to the A-scan, are the functions of the corresponding function group. The display of the functions disappears in the zoom mode.

4-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Screen display

Other displays The measurement line below the screen display shows values of settings, measured values, and status indications. As an alternative, a scale can be shown here, giving an overview of the echo positions. H Note: Every measurement value can also be shown in an enlarged display at the top right corner of the A-scan (setting in the function group MEAS, function S-DISP).

Amplitude height Gate A (%)

H Note: You can configure the four positions of the measurement line for set and measured values as required (function group MSEL). Please refer to chapter 5.14, section Configuring the measurement line on this subject.

Amplitude height Gate B (%)

Status indicator: TOF = Flank

Sound path Gate B

Sound path Gate A

Example of a measurement line Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-5


Screen display

Other displays The measurement line below the screen display shows values of settings, measured values, and status indications. As an alternative, a scale can be shown here, giving an overview of the echo positions. H Note: Every measurement value can also be shown in an enlarged display at the top right corner of the A-scan (setting in the function group MEAS, function S-DISP).

Amplitude height Gate A (%)

H Note: You can configure the four positions of the measurement line for set and measured values as required (function group MSEL). Please refer to chapter 5.14, section Configuring the measurement line on this subject.

Amplitude height Gate B (%)

Sound path Gate A

Status indicator: TOF = Flank

Sound path Gate B

Example of a measurement line Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-5


Keys and rotary knobs

4.3 Keys and rotary knobs Function keys For changing between operation levels (below), For selection of the function groups (below) and For selection of the functions (right).

On/Off key For turning the device on or off.

4-6

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X


4.3 Keys and rotary knobs Function keys For changing between operation levels (below), For selection of the function groups (below) and For selection of the functions (right).

On/Off key For turning the device on or off.

4-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X



Special keys To directly activate individual instrument functions: To choose the increment for the gain setting To freeze the A-scan To display a zoomed A-scan To transfer the data To record measured values and to save the data

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-7



Special keys To directly activate individual instrument functions: To choose the increment for the gain setting To freeze the A-scan To display a zoomed A-scan To transfer the data To record measured values and to save the data

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-7



4.4 Operational concept

Rotary knobs The USM 35X is equipped with two rotary knobs. The left-hand rotary knob enables you to directly set the gain; the right-hand rotary knob serves for setting the currently selected function. The two rotary knobs enable both step-by-step and accelerated settings. You can define a setting step by step by slightly operating the rotary knob which will snap into place at the next setting. To accelerate the setting, operate the rotary knob continuously, i.e. at a constant speed. This enables you to quickly bridge great differences between the settings.

The USM 35X is an easy-to-use instrument. It has three operating levels, and you can change between them by pressing the key. You will recognize your currently active operating level by the number on the separation line between the first and the second function group. If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger option, a fourth operating level is added to the existing ones. Each operating level contains five function groups. First operating level

Second operating level

Third operating level

4-8

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X


4.4 Operational concept

Rotary knobs The USM 35X is equipped with two rotary knobs. The left-hand rotary knob enables you to directly set the gain; the right-hand rotary knob serves for setting the currently selected function. The two rotary knobs enable both step-by-step and accelerated settings. You can define a setting step by step by slightly operating the rotary knob which will snap into place at the next setting. To accelerate the setting, operate the rotary knob continuously, i.e. at a constant speed. This enables you to quickly bridge great differences between the settings.

The USM 35X is an easy-to-use instrument. It has three operating levels, and you can change between them by pressing the key. You will recognize your currently active operating level by the number on the separation line between the first and the second function group. If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger option, a fourth operating level is added to the existing ones. Each operating level contains five function groups. First operating level



4-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Operational concept

Setting the functions

The following functions offer a choice between coarse and fine adjustment:

Shown below the A-scan are five function groups that you can directly select using the corresponding key. The selected function group is highlighted and the corresponding four functions are displayed next to the A-scan on the right. You can likewise directly select the individual functions using the corresponding keys. Functions with double assignments Some functions have double assignments. You will recognize the functions with double assignments by an arrow (icon >) after the function name. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

Function RANGE MTLVEL D-DELAY aSTART aWIDTH bWIDTH S-REF1 S-REF2 ANGLE THICKNE DIAMET

Function group BASE BASE BASE aGAT aGAT bGAT CAL CAL TRIG TRIG TRIG

For more details on the adjustment possibilities, please read from page 5-5 onward.

Coarse and fine adjustment of functions You can choose between coarse and fine adjustment for some functions. You can toggle between these two adjustment modes by pressing the corresponding key several times. The fine adjustment is identified by an asterisk preceding the function value.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-9


Operational concept

Setting the functions

The following functions offer a choice between coarse and fine adjustment:

Shown below the A-scan are five function groups that you can directly select using the corresponding key. The selected function group is highlighted and the corresponding four functions are displayed next to the A-scan on the right. You can likewise directly select the individual functions using the corresponding keys. Functions with double assignments Some functions have double assignments. You will recognize the functions with double assignments by an arrow (icon >) after the function name. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

Function RANGE MTLVEL D-DELAY aSTART aWIDTH bWIDTH S-REF1 S-REF2 ANGLE THICKNE DIAMET

Function group BASE BASE BASE aGAT aGAT bGAT CAL CAL TRIG TRIG TRIG

For more details on the adjustment possibilities, please read from page 5-5 onward.

Coarse and fine adjustment of functions You can choose between coarse and fine adjustment for some functions. You can toggle between these two adjustment modes by pressing the corresponding key several times. The fine adjustment is identified by an asterisk preceding the function value.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-9


Important basic settings

4.5 Important basic settings Selecting the language Select the language in which the function names should be displayed on the screen in the function DIALOG (Function group CFG1). The following languages are available: • German • English (default setting) • French • Italian • Spanish • Portuguese • Dutch • Swedish • Slovenian • Romanian • Finnish • Czech • Danish • Hungarian • Croatian 4-10

• Russian • Slovakian • Norwegian • Polish • Japanese H Note: More dialog languages can be added on request. – If necessary, go to the third operating level. – In the function group CFG1 select the function DIALOG.

Issue 01, 04/2005



4.5 Important basic settings Selecting the language Select the language in which the function names should be displayed on the screen in the function DIALOG (Function group CFG1). The following languages are available: • German • English (default setting) • French • Italian • Spanish • Portuguese • Dutch • Swedish • Slovenian • Romanian • Finnish • Czech • Danish • Hungarian • Croatian 4-10

Krautkramer USM 35X

• Russian • Slovakian • Norwegian • Polish • Japanese H Note: More dialog languages can be added on request. – If necessary, go to the third operating level. – In the function group CFG1 select the function DIALOG.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X



H Note: Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Select the required language by means of the righthand rotary knob.

Selecting units In the function UNIT (function group CFG1) you can choose your favorite units between mm or inch. H Note: – If necessary, go to the third operating level. – In the function group CFG1 select the function UNIT.

Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Set the required unit by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

A Attention: Select your units immediately when you start working with the USM 35X because if you change the unit, all the current settings are deleted, and the basic setup is loaded again. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-11



H Note: Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Select the required language by means of the righthand rotary knob.

Selecting units In the function UNIT (function group CFG1) you can choose your favorite units between mm or inch. H Note: – If necessary, go to the third operating level. – In the function group CFG1 select the function UNIT.

Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Set the required unit by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

A Attention: Select your units immediately when you start working with the USM 35X because if you change the unit, all the current settings are deleted, and the basic setup is loaded again. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-11



In order not to delete anything by accident, a safety prompt is displayed in the measurement line. – If you are sure that you want to change the unit, press the key belonging to the function UNIT one more time.

– If necessary, change to the third operation level. – Select the function DATE in the function group CFG2.

The unit is now changed, the current data are deleted. – If you want to abort the process, press any other key. The previous setting is kept in that case.

Setting the date The date is saved together with the test results. You can set it in the function DATE (function group CFG2).

A Attention: Please take into account that the USM 35X only indicates the year with two digits. You should always make sure that you use correctly set values of date. Test results may otherwise be falsified. 4-12

H Note: Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that you want to vary, e.g. the day. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected value.

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X


In order not to delete anything by accident, a safety prompt is displayed in the measurement line. – If you are sure that you want to change the unit, press the key belonging to the function UNIT one more time.

– If necessary, change to the third operation level. – Select the function DATE in the function group CFG2.

The unit is now changed, the current data are deleted. – If you want to abort the process, press any other key. The previous setting is kept in that case.

Setting the date The date is saved together with the test results. You can set it in the function DATE (function group CFG2).

A Attention: Please take into account that the USM 35X only indicates the year with two digits. You should always make sure that you use correctly set values of date. Test results may otherwise be falsified. 4-12

H Note: Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that you want to vary, e.g. the day. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected value.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X



Setting the time The function TIME (function group CFG2) serves for setting the current hour of time. It is saved together with the test results.

A Attention: You should always make sure that you are using the correct time settings. Test results may otherwise be falsified. Don’t forget to manually set the time when changing from winter to summer time. – If necessary, change to the third operation level. – Select the function TIME in the function group CFG2.

H Note: Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that you want to vary, e.g. the hour. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected value.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-13



Setting the time The function TIME (function group CFG2) serves for setting the current hour of time. It is saved together with the test results.

A Attention: You should always make sure that you are using the correct time settings. Test results may otherwise be falsified. Don’t forget to manually set the time when changing from winter to summer time. – If necessary, change to the third operation level. – Select the function TIME in the function group CFG2.

H Note: Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . – Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that you want to vary, e.g. the hour. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected value.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

4-13


Basic settings of the display

4.6 Basic settings of the display The equipment of the USM 35X includes a high-resolution color display. You can optimize the display settings to your individual viewing habits and to the operational environment.

– If necessary, change to the third operation level. – Select the function SCHEME in the function group LCD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required color scheme.

Selecting the color scheme

Setting the lighting

You can use the function SCHEME (function group LCD) to choose one of four color schemes. The color scheme determines the color of all displays and that of the background. You cannot vary the colors of gates because they are fixed as follows:

Use the function LIGHT (function group LCD) to set the display lighting. You can choose between the default lighting max. and a lighting in the economy mode min..

• Gate A – red • Gate B – green

The economy mode reduces the current consumption and consequently increases the operating time in battery operation.

• Gate C – blue

– If necessary, change to the third operation level.

H Note:

– Select the function LIGHT in the function group LCD.

All color schemes are suitable for indoor use. For outdoor use, we recommend the color schemes 3 and 4.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required lighting.

4-14

H Note:

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Basic settings of the display

4.6 Basic settings of the display The equipment of the USM 35X includes a high-resolution color display. You can optimize the display settings to your individual viewing habits and to the operational environment.

– If necessary, change to the third operation level. – Select the function SCHEME in the function group LCD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required color scheme.

Selecting the color scheme

Setting the lighting

You can use the function SCHEME (function group LCD) to choose one of four color schemes. The color scheme determines the color of all displays and that of the background. You cannot vary the colors of gates because they are fixed as follows:

Use the function LIGHT (function group LCD) to set the display lighting. You can choose between the default lighting max. and a lighting in the economy mode min..

• Gate A – red • Gate B – green


• Gate C – blue

– If necessary, change to the third operation level.

H Note:

– Select the function LIGHT in the function group LCD.


– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required lighting.

4-14

H Note:

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-1

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5

5

5-1

Operation

Overview of the functions

5.1 Overview of the functions The functions of the USM 35X are combined to form function groups on three operating levels. If the instrument has the option Data Logger, there is an additional fourth operation level. – Press the levels.

key to change between the operating

– Press the above it.

key to select the function group shown

Each operating level contains five function groups. You will recognize your currently active operating level by the number on the separation line between the first and the second function group. First operating level


– Press the key to select the function shown next to it. The setting of the selected function is carried out via the right-hand rotary knob.


The gain function is always directly available via the left-hand rotary knob.

H Note:

You can carry out important functions (switch on/off, dB-step, freeze, zoom and report printout) by pressing the special keys (ref. chapter 4).

If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger option, a fourth operating level is added. For this, refer to the corresponding chapter Option Data Logger.

You will also find an overview of the function groups and their functions on the fold-out page. 5-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


5.1 Overview of the functions The functions of the USM 35X are combined to form function groups on three operating levels. If the instrument has the option Data Logger, there is an additional fourth operation level. – Press the levels.

key to change between the operating

– Press the above it.

key to select the function group shown

Each operating level contains five function groups. You will recognize your currently active operating level by the number on the separation line between the first and the second function group. First operating level


– Press the key to select the function shown next to it. The setting of the selected function is carried out via the right-hand rotary knob.


The gain function is always directly available via the left-hand rotary knob.

H Note:

You can carry out important functions (switch on/off, dB-step, freeze, zoom and report printout) by pressing the special keys (ref. chapter 4).

If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger option, a fourth operating level is added. For this, refer to the corresponding chapter Option Data Logger.

You will also find an overview of the function groups and their functions on the fold-out page. 5-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Function groups first operating level

Function groups second operating level

BASE

The functions that you find here are required for the basic adjustment of the screen displays.

CAL

This function group makes functions for the semiautomatic calibration available to you.

REF

PULS

Combined in this group are the functions that serve for the adjustment of pulser.

This function group serves for measuring the dB difference between a reference echo and the reflector echo.

RECV

Combined in this group are the functions that serve for the adjustment of receiver.

aGAT

All functions for setting the gate A can be found in this group.

bGAT

All functions for setting the gate B can be found in this group.

or AWS

This is where you will find all functions for the classification of flaws in welds according to the AWS D1.1 specification. or

DAC

This is the function group where you can set the functions for the DAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S). or

Krautkramer USM 35X

JDAC

The DAC functions in this function group are modified to allow for a flaw evaluation according to JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S).

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-3

Operation


Function groups first operating level

Function groups second operating level

BASE

The functions that you find here are required for the basic adjustment of the screen displays.

CAL

This function group makes functions for the semiautomatic calibration available to you.

REF

PULS

Combined in this group are the functions that serve for the adjustment of pulser.

This function group serves for measuring the dB difference between a reference echo and the reflector echo.

RECV

Combined in this group are the functions that serve for the adjustment of receiver.

aGAT

All functions for setting the gate A can be found in this group.

bGAT

All functions for setting the gate B can be found in this group.

or AWS

This is where you will find all functions for the classification of flaws in welds according to the AWS D1.1 specification. or

DAC

This is the function group where you can set the functions for the DAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S). or

Krautkramer USM 35X

JDAC

The DAC functions in this function group are modified to allow for a flaw evaluation according to JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S).

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-3

Operation


or

Function groups third operating level

DGS

This function group serves for the amplitude evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S).

MEAS

TRIG

Combined in this group are the functions required for angle beaming using anglebeam probes for the display of a (reduced) projection distance and depth position of a reflector (for plane-parallel and circular curved test components).

In this group, you can define the measuring point, select a parameter for the zoomed measured-value display in the A-scan as well as for the setting of the Magnify function, and you can select different settings for the A-scan.

MSEL

This is where you configure your measurement line. You can choose one display for each of the four positions.

LCD

This is the function group where you can set the LCD contrast and backlight as well as the echo display mode on the screen.

CFG1

Functions for the configuration: unit, dialog language, printer driver and assignment of the key

CFG2

Other functions for configuration: time and date, alarm horn; plus the changeover between the evaluation modes

MEM

These functions serve for storing, loading and deleting of data sets.

DATA

The functions of this group serve for the dataset management and documentation.

5-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


or

Function groups third operating level

DGS

This function group serves for the amplitude evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S).

MEAS

TRIG

Combined in this group are the functions required for angle beaming using anglebeam probes for the display of a (reduced) projection distance and depth position of a reflector (for plane-parallel and circular curved test components).

In this group, you can define the measuring point, select a parameter for the zoomed measured-value display in the A-scan as well as for the setting of the Magnify function, and you can select different settings for the A-scan.

MSEL

This is where you configure your measurement line. You can choose one display for each of the four positions.

LCD

This is the function group where you can set the LCD contrast and backlight as well as the echo display mode on the screen.

CFG1

Functions for the configuration: unit, dialog language, printer driver and assignment of the key

CFG2

Other functions for configuration: time and date, alarm horn; plus the changeover between the evaluation modes

MEM

These functions serve for storing, loading and deleting of data sets.

DATA

The functions of this group serve for the dataset management and documentation.

5-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Setting the gain

5.2 Setting the gain

Defining the dB incrementation for gain

This function, operated via the left-hand rotary knob, enables you to quickly and directly set the gain.

You can use the key to select a certain incrementation for setting the gain. You have a choice between 6 steps:

You can use the gain to adjust the required sensitivity in order to control the echo amplitudes.

• 0.0 dB (locked)

– Turn the left-hand rotary knob to set the gain. The current gain is indicated in the top left corner of the screen.

• 1.0 dB

• 0.5 dB • 2.0 dB • 6.0 dB • 6.5 … 20.0 dB H Note: The setting 0.0 dB locks the gain in this way preventing any accidental change of setting. You can determine the step size of the sixth step using the function dBSTEP in the function group RECV. – Press to change between the six steps. The corresponding step size setting is indicated below the current gain on the screen.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-5

Operation

Setting the gain

5.2 Setting the gain

Defining the dB incrementation for gain

This function, operated via the left-hand rotary knob, enables you to quickly and directly set the gain.

You can use the key to select a certain incrementation for setting the gain. You have a choice between 6 steps:

You can use the gain to adjust the required sensitivity in order to control the echo amplitudes.

• 0.0 dB (locked)

– Turn the left-hand rotary knob to set the gain. The current gain is indicated in the top left corner of the screen.

• 1.0 dB

• 0.5 dB • 2.0 dB • 6.0 dB • 6.5 … 20.0 dB H Note: The setting 0.0 dB locks the gain in this way preventing any accidental change of setting. You can determine the step size of the sixth step using the function dBSTEP in the function group RECV. – Press to change between the six steps. The corresponding step size setting is indicated below the current gain on the screen.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-5

Operation

Adjusting the display range (function group BASE)

5.3 Adjusting the display range (function group BASE) The function group BASE enables you to make the basic adjustment of the display range. The display on the screen must be adjusted for the material to be tested (function MTLVEL) and for the probe used (function P-DELAY). – If required, go to the first operating level.

H Note: In order to accurately adjust the material velocity and the probe delay, please read the section Calibrating the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, beforehand.

RANGE (Display range) You can adjust the range for your measurement in RANGE. • Coarse adjustment: from 0.5 mm ... 1400 (9999) mm in even steps

– Select the function group BASE.

• Fine adjustment: up to 9.99 mm in steps of 0.01 mm up to 99.9 mm in steps of 0.1 mm up to 999 mm in steps of 1 mm H Note: The adjustment range for the display range depends on the frequency range setting (function FREQU in function group RECV).

5-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.3 Adjusting the display range (function group BASE) The function group BASE enables you to make the basic adjustment of the display range. The display on the screen must be adjusted for the material to be tested (function MTLVEL) and for the probe used (function P-DELAY). – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group BASE.

Krautkramer USM 35X

H Note: In order to accurately adjust the material velocity and the probe delay, please read the section Calibrating the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, beforehand.

RANGE (Display range) You can adjust the range for your measurement in RANGE. • Coarse adjustment: from 0.5 mm ... 1400 (9999) mm in even steps • Fine adjustment: up to 9.99 mm in steps of 0.01 mm up to 99.9 mm in steps of 0.1 mm up to 999 mm in steps of 1 mm H Note: The adjustment range for the display range depends on the frequency range setting (function FREQU in function group RECV).

5-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Frequency range 0.2 to 1 MHz 0.5 to 4 MHz 0.8 to 8 MHz 2 to 20 MHz

Adjustment range (c = 5920 m/s) 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390" 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390" 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50" 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50"

– Select the function RANGE. – If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjustment.

• Fine adjustment 1000 ... 15000 in steps of 1 m/s

A Attention: Always ensure that the function MTLVEL is correctly set. The USM 35X calculates all range and distance indications on the basis of the value adjusted here. – Select the function MTLVEL.

– Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

– If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjustment.

MTLVEL (Sound velocity)


Use MTLVEL to set the sound velocity within the test object. You can use sound velocities between 1000 and 15000 m/s.

D-DELAY (Display starting point)

• Coarse adjustment, in steps as follows (m/s): 15000 9000 5000 2000 14000 8000 4000 1600 13000 7000 3250 1450 12000 6320 3130 1000 11000 6000 3000 10000 5920 2730 Krautkramer USM 35X

Here you can choose whether to display the adjusted range (for example 250 mm) starting from the surface of the test object, or in a section of the test object starting at a later point. This allows you to shift the complete screen display and consequently also the display zero.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


Frequency range 0.2 to 1 MHz 0.5 to 4 MHz 0.8 to 8 MHz 2 to 20 MHz

5-7

Adjustment range (c = 5920 m/s) 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390" 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390" 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50" 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50"

– Select the function RANGE. – If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjustment.

• Fine adjustment 1000 ... 15000 in steps of 1 m/s

A Attention: Always ensure that the function MTLVEL is correctly set. The USM 35X calculates all range and distance indications on the basis of the value adjusted here. – Select the function MTLVEL.



MTLVEL (Sound velocity)


Use MTLVEL to set the sound velocity within the test object. You can use sound velocities between 1000 and 15000 m/s.

D-DELAY (Display starting point)

• Coarse adjustment, in steps as follows (m/s): 15000 9000 5000 2000 14000 8000 4000 1600 13000 7000 3250 1450 12000 6320 3130 1000 11000 6000 3000 10000 5920 2730 Krautkramer USM 35X

Here you can choose whether to display the adjusted range (for example 250 mm) starting from the surface of the test object, or in a section of the test object starting at a later point. This allows you to shift the complete screen display and consequently also the display zero.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-7

Operation


If the display should for example start from the surface of the test object, the value in D-DELAY must be set to 0. • Coarse adjustment –10 mm ... 1024 mm/–0.3" ... 40" in even steps • Fine adjustment up to 99.9 mm/9.999" in steps of 0.01 mm/0.001" up to 1024 mm/10" in steps of 0.1 mm/0.001"

P-DELAY (Probe delay) Every probe has a delay line between the transducer element and the coupling face. This means that the initial pulse must first pass through this delay line before the sound wave can enter the test object. You can compensate for this influence of the delay line in the function P-DELAY.

– Select the function D-DELAY.

H Note:


If the value for P-DELAY is not known, read the section Calibrating the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, in order to determine this value.

– Adjust the value for the display starting point by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

– Select the function P-DELAY. – Adjust the value for the probe delay by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

5-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


If the display should for example start from the surface of the test object, the value in D-DELAY must be set to 0. • Coarse adjustment –10 mm ... 1024 mm/–0.3" ... 40" in even steps • Fine adjustment up to 99.9 mm/9.999" in steps of 0.01 mm/0.001" up to 1024 mm/10" in steps of 0.1 mm/0.001"

P-DELAY (Probe delay) Every probe has a delay line between the transducer element and the coupling face. This means that the initial pulse must first pass through this delay line before the sound wave can enter the test object. You can compensate for this influence of the delay line in the function P-DELAY.

– Select the function D-DELAY.

H Note:


If the value for P-DELAY is not known, read the section Calibrating the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, in order to determine this value.

– Adjust the value for the display starting point by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

– Select the function P-DELAY. – Adjust the value for the probe delay by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

5-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS)

5.4 Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS)

DAMPING (Probe matching)

You will find all functions for the adjustment of the pulser in the function group PULS.

This function serves for matching the probe. You can use it to adjust the damping of the probe’s oscillating circuit and to consequently change the height, width and resolution of the echo display. • low This setting has a lower damping effect and produces higher and broader echoes.

– If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group PULS.

• high This setting reduces the echo height but mostly also produces narrow echoes with higher resolution. – Select the function DAMPING. – Set the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.4 Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS)

DAMPING (Probe matching)

You will find all functions for the adjustment of the pulser in the function group PULS. – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group PULS.

5-9

This function serves for matching the probe. You can use it to adjust the damping of the probe’s oscillating circuit and to consequently change the height, width and resolution of the echo display. • low This setting has a lower damping effect and produces higher and broader echoes. • high This setting reduces the echo height but mostly also produces narrow echoes with higher resolution. – Select the function DAMPING. – Set the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-9

Operation


POWER (Intensity)

DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation)

Use the function POWER to set the pulser voltage. You can choose between two settings:

You can use the function DUAL to activate the pulserreceiver separation.

• high – high voltage • low – low voltage

• off Single-element operation; the probe connection sockets are connected in parallel.

The setting high is recommended for all inspections in which maximum sensitivity is important, e.g. for the detection of small flaws. Choose the setting low for broadband probes or if narrow echoes are required (better lateral resolution).

• on Dual mode for the use with dual-element (TR) probes; the left-hand socket (red) is connected with the amplifier input whereas the initial pulse is available at the right-hand socket (black).

– Select the function POWER.

• through Through-transmission mode for the use with two separate probes; the receiver is connected with left (red), the pulser is connected with right (black).

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required setting.

– Select the function DUAL. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required setting. If the DUAL function is active, the LED D (dual) is on.

5-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


POWER (Intensity)

DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation)

Use the function POWER to set the pulser voltage. You can choose between two settings:

You can use the function DUAL to activate the pulserreceiver separation.

• high – high voltage • low – low voltage

• off Single-element operation; the probe connection sockets are connected in parallel.

The setting high is recommended for all inspections in which maximum sensitivity is important, e.g. for the detection of small flaws. Choose the setting low for broadband probes or if narrow echoes are required (better lateral resolution).

• on Dual mode for the use with dual-element (TR) probes; the left-hand socket (red) is connected with the amplifier input whereas the initial pulse is available at the right-hand socket (black).

– Select the function POWER.

• through Through-transmission mode for the use with two separate probes; the receiver is connected with left (red), the pulser is connected with right (black).

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required setting.

– Select the function DUAL. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required setting. If the DUAL function is active, the LED D (dual) is on.

5-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


PRF-MOD(Pulse repetition frequency) The pulse repetition frequency indicates the number of times an initial pulse is triggered per second. You can determine whether you need the highest possible PRF value, or whether you are satisfied with a low value. You have 10 steps available for the setting; step 1 means the lowest PRF value. The larger your workpiece, the smaller PRF values are needed in order to avoid phantom echoes. In the case of smaller PRF values, however, the A-scan update rate becomes lower; for this reason, high values are required if a workpiece should be scanned fast.

5.5 Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV) You will find all functions for the adjustment of the pulser in the function group RECV. – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group RECV.

The best way to determine the suitable PRF value is by experimenting: start from the highest step and reduce the value until there are no more phantom echoes. – Select the function PRF-MOD. – Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

H Note: Double assignment of the function FINE G/dBSTEP (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-11

Operation


PRF-MOD(Pulse repetition frequency) The pulse repetition frequency indicates the number of times an initial pulse is triggered per second. You can determine whether you need the highest possible PRF value, or whether you are satisfied with a low value. You have 10 steps available for the setting; step 1 means the lowest PRF value. The larger your workpiece, the smaller PRF values are needed in order to avoid phantom echoes. In the case of smaller PRF values, however, the A-scan update rate becomes lower; for this reason, high values are required if a workpiece should be scanned fast.

5.5 Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV) You will find all functions for the adjustment of the pulser in the function group RECV. – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group RECV.

The best way to determine the suitable PRF value is by experimenting: start from the highest step and reduce the value until there are no more phantom echoes. – Select the function PRF-MOD. – Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

H Note: Double assignment of the function FINE G/dBSTEP (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-11

Operation

Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV)

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain)

REJECT

This function serves for the fine adjustment of the current gain value. The fine adjustment is possible over a range of 40 steps within the range of approx. 4 dB. The displayed gain value will not change.

The function REJECT allows you to suppress unwanted echo indications, for example structural noise from your test object.

Adjustment range: –10 ... +30 – Select the function FINE G. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the value for the fine gain.

dBSTEP Use this function to set a step size for the gain variation by means of the key . The value set here is subsequently available to you as the sixth step for the stepwise gain variation. You have a free choice of the value within the setting range.

The % screen height setting indicates the minimum height that the echoes should attain in order for them to be displayed on the screen at all. The Reject setting cannot be higher than the lowest threshold setting (minus 1 %) of any gate.

A Attention: You should handle this function with great caution, as it may of course happen that you suppress echoes from flaws as well. Many test specifications expressly forbid using the reject function. – Select the function REJECT.

Setting range: 6.5 ... 20 dB

– Set the required percentage value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

– Select the function dBSTEP.

The LED R is therefore lit with active REJECT function.

– Set the value for the gain by means of the right-hand rotary knob. 5-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain)

REJECT

This function serves for the fine adjustment of the current gain value. The fine adjustment is possible over a range of 40 steps within the range of approx. 4 dB. The displayed gain value will not change.

The function REJECT allows you to suppress unwanted echo indications, for example structural noise from your test object.

Adjustment range: –10 ... +30 – Select the function FINE G. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the value for the fine gain.

dBSTEP Use this function to set a step size for the gain variation by means of the key . The value set here is subsequently available to you as the sixth step for the stepwise gain variation. You have a free choice of the value within the setting range.

The % screen height setting indicates the minimum height that the echoes should attain in order for them to be displayed on the screen at all. The Reject setting cannot be higher than the lowest threshold setting (minus 1 %) of any gate.

A Attention: You should handle this function with great caution, as it may of course happen that you suppress echoes from flaws as well. Many test specifications expressly forbid using the reject function. – Select the function REJECT.

Setting range: 6.5 ... 20 dB

– Set the required percentage value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

– Select the function dBSTEP.

The LED R is therefore lit with active REJECT function.

– Set the value for the gain by means of the right-hand rotary knob. 5-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


FREQU (Frequency range)

RECTIFY (Rectification)

In this function, you can adjust the operating frequency according to the frequency of your probe.

You can select the rectification mode of the echo pulses according to your application in the function RECTIFY. You have the following options to choose from:

You have a choice between four frequency ranges: • full-w (= full-wave) All half-waves are displayed above the baseline.

• 0.2 ... 1 MHz • 0.5 ... 4 MHz

• pos hw (= positive half-wave) Only positive half-waves are displayed.

• 0.8 ... 8 MHz

• neg hw (= negative half-wave) Only negative half-waves are displayed.

• 2 ... 20 MHz – Select the function FREQU. – Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

• rf (= radio frequency) Only applies to the display range up to 50 mm (steel). – Select the function RECTIFY. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-13

Operation


FREQU (Frequency range)

RECTIFY (Rectification)

In this function, you can adjust the operating frequency according to the frequency of your probe.

You can select the rectification mode of the echo pulses according to your application in the function RECTIFY. You have the following options to choose from:

You have a choice between four frequency ranges: • full-w (= full-wave) All half-waves are displayed above the baseline.

• 0.2 ... 1 MHz • 0.5 ... 4 MHz

• pos hw (= positive half-wave) Only positive half-waves are displayed.

• 0.8 ... 8 MHz

• neg hw (= negative half-wave) Only negative half-waves are displayed.

• 2 ... 20 MHz – Select the function FREQU. – Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand rotary knob.

• rf (= radio frequency) Only applies to the display range up to 50 mm (steel). – Select the function RECTIFY. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-13

Operation

Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

5.6 Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

H Note: If you have an instrument equipped with the Data Logger option at your disposal, you’ll be additionally able to use the C gate including all corresponding functions.

All functions for setting the (dual) gate are arranged in the function group aGAT and bGAT.

Tasks of the gates • It monitors the range of the test object where you expect to detect a flaw. If an echo exceeds or falls below the gate, an alarm signal is output via the LED A.

– If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group aGAT or bGAT.

• The gates A and B are independant of one another. Gate A can also have the function of an echo-start gate. • The gate chooses the echo for the digital time-offlight or amplitude measurement. The measured value is indicated in the measurement line. H Note: Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is 5-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.6 Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

H Note: If you have an instrument equipped with the Data Logger option at your disposal, you’ll be additionally able to use the C gate including all corresponding functions.

All functions for setting the (dual) gate are arranged in the function group aGAT and bGAT. – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group aGAT or bGAT.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Tasks of the gates • It monitors the range of the test object where you expect to detect a flaw. If an echo exceeds or falls below the gate, an alarm signal is output via the LED A. • The gates A and B are independant of one another. Gate A can also have the function of an echo-start gate. • The gate chooses the echo for the digital time-offlight or amplitude measurement. The measured value is indicated in the measurement line. H Note: Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is

5-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored. Display of gates To make the assignment easier, the gates are displayed in different colors. You cannot vary the colors of gates because they are fixed as follows: • Gate A – red • Gate B – green

• pos – Coincidence The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response threshold of the gate is exceeded within the displayed range. • neg – Anticoincidence The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response threshold of the gate is not reached within the displayed range. • a trig – Triggering by interface echo When using gate A as echo-start gate (setting of the evaluation logic for gate B)

• Gate C – blue

– Select the function aLOGIC or bLOGIC.

aLOGIC/bLOGIC (Evaluation logic of the gates)

– Set the required alarm logic by means of the righthand rotary knob.

This function allows you to choose the method for triggering the gate alarm. The alarm is output to the LED A on the front panel of the USM 35X. There are four setting options available:

Krautkramer USM 35X

• off – Evaluation logic off The alarm and measurement capability are switched off. The gate is not visible.

H Note: The alarm and measurement function of the gates is only active within the display range.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored. Display of gates To make the assignment easier, the gates are displayed in different colors. You cannot vary the colors of gates because they are fixed as follows: • Gate A – red • Gate B – green

• off – Evaluation logic off The alarm and measurement capability are switched off. The gate is not visible. • pos – Coincidence The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response threshold of the gate is exceeded within the displayed range. • neg – Anticoincidence The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response threshold of the gate is not reached within the displayed range. • a trig – Triggering by interface echo When using gate A as echo-start gate (setting of the evaluation logic for gate B)

• Gate C – blue

– Select the function aLOGIC or bLOGIC.

aLOGIC/bLOGIC (Evaluation logic of the gates)

– Set the required alarm logic by means of the righthand rotary knob.

This function allows you to choose the method for triggering the gate alarm. The alarm is output to the LED A on the front panel of the USM 35X. There are four setting options available:

Krautkramer USM 35X

5-15

H Note: The alarm and measurement function of the gates is only active within the display range.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-15

Operation


aSTART/bSTART (Starting points of the gates)

aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and measurement threshold of the gates)

You can fix the starting point of the gates A or B within the adjustment range of 0 ... 9999 mm/250".

You can determine the threshold value of the gates within the range of 10 to 90 % screen height for triggering the LED alarm if this value is exceeded or not reached, depending on the setting of the aLOGIC/bLOGIC function. In the RF mode, the threshold can be additionally set from –90 % to –10 %.

– Select the function aSTART or bSTART. – Uuse the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required setting.

– Select the function aTHRSH or bTHRSH. – Set the required value using the right-hand rotary knob.

aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) You can determine the gate width within the range of 0.2 ... 9999 mm/0.008 ... 250". – Select the function aWIDTH or bWIDTH. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required value.

5-16

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


aSTART/bSTART (Starting points of the gates)

aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and measurement threshold of the gates)

You can fix the starting point of the gates A or B within the adjustment range of 0 ... 9999 mm/250".

You can determine the threshold value of the gates within the range of 10 to 90 % screen height for triggering the LED alarm if this value is exceeded or not reached, depending on the setting of the aLOGIC/bLOGIC function. In the RF mode, the threshold can be additionally set from –90 % to –10 %.

– Select the function aSTART or bSTART. – Uuse the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required setting.

– Select the function aTHRSH or bTHRSH. – Set the required value using the right-hand rotary knob.

aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) You can determine the gate width within the range of 0.2 ... 9999 mm/0.008 ... 250". – Select the function aWIDTH or bWIDTH. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required value.

5-16

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Calibrating the USM 35X

5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X

Choosing the measuring point

Calibrating the display range Before working with the USM 35X, you have to calibrate the instrument: you have to adjust the material velocity and display range and allow for the probe delay depending on the material and dimensions of the test object. To ensure a safe and proper operation of the USM 35X, it is necessary that the operator be adequately trained in the field of ultrasonic testing technology. Below you will find some examples of common calibration methods for certain test tasks. In addition, the USM 35X has a semiautomatic calibration function which is described as Case B: With unknown material velocity.

Krautkramer USM 35X

The sound path measurement in the calibration process or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends on the choice of the measuring point which can be set either to flank, to jflank or to peak in the USM 35X. In principle, the peak measurement should be preferred because the measured distances do not depend on the echo height in that case. However, there are application cases in which the flank measurement is either specified, or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in many tests using dual-element (TR) probes.

A Attention: In any case, the setting of the measuring point must always be identical for the calibration and for the subsequent test application. Otherwise measurement errors might occur.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X

Choosing the measuring point

Calibrating the display range Before working with the USM 35X, you have to calibrate the instrument: you have to adjust the material velocity and display range and allow for the probe delay depending on the material and dimensions of the test object. To ensure a safe and proper operation of the USM 35X, it is necessary that the operator be adequately trained in the field of ultrasonic testing technology. Below you will find some examples of common calibration methods for certain test tasks. In addition, the USM 35X has a semiautomatic calibration function which is described as Case B: With unknown material velocity.

Krautkramer USM 35X

5-17

The sound path measurement in the calibration process or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends on the choice of the measuring point which can be set either to flank, to jflank or to peak in the USM 35X. In principle, the peak measurement should be preferred because the measured distances do not depend on the echo height in that case. However, there are application cases in which the flank measurement is either specified, or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in many tests using dual-element (TR) probes.

A Attention: In any case, the setting of the measuring point must always be identical for the calibration and for the subsequent test application. Otherwise measurement errors might occur.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-17

Operation


Calibration with straight- and angle-beam probes

Example: You are carrying out the calibration for the calibration range of 100 mm/5" via the function group BASE using the calibration block V1 (thickness 25 mm/1") which is laid flatwise.

Case A: With known material velocity Calibration process – Set the known material velocity in MTLVEL (function group BASE). – Couple the probe to the calibration block. – Set the required display range in RANGE (function group BASE). The calibration echo must be displayed on the screen. – Position the gate on one of the calibration echoes until the sound path of the echo is indicated in the measurement line. – After this, change the adjustment of the function P-DELAY (function group BASE) until the correct sound path for the selected calibration echo is indicated in the measurement line.

5-18

– Set RANGE to 100 mm/5". – Set the known material velocity of 5920 m/s (233 "/ms) in MTLVEL. – Set the gate so that it is positioned on the first calibration echo (from 25 mm/1"). – Read the sound path in the measurement line. If this value is not equal to 25 mm/1", change the adjustment for the function P-DELAY until it is at 25 mm/1". This completes the calibration of the USM 35X to the material velocity of 5920 m/s (233 "/ms) with a calibration range of 100 mm/5" for the probe used.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


Calibration with straight- and angle-beam probes

Example: You are carrying out the calibration for the calibration range of 100 mm/5" via the function group BASE using the calibration block V1 (thickness 25 mm/1") which is laid flatwise.

Case A: With known material velocity Calibration process – Set the known material velocity in MTLVEL (function group BASE). – Couple the probe to the calibration block. – Set the required display range in RANGE (function group BASE). The calibration echo must be displayed on the screen. – Position the gate on one of the calibration echoes until the sound path of the echo is indicated in the measurement line. – After this, change the adjustment of the function P-DELAY (function group BASE) until the correct sound path for the selected calibration echo is indicated in the measurement line.

5-18

Krautkramer USM 35X

– Set RANGE to 100 mm/5". – Set the known material velocity of 5920 m/s (233 "/ms) in MTLVEL. – Set the gate so that it is positioned on the first calibration echo (from 25 mm/1"). – Read the sound path in the measurement line. If this value is not equal to 25 mm/1", change the adjustment for the function P-DELAY until it is at 25 mm/1". This completes the calibration of the USM 35X to the material velocity of 5920 m/s (233 "/ms) with a calibration range of 100 mm/5" for the probe used.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Case B: With unknown material velocity

Calibration process

Use the semiautomatic calibration function of the USM 35X via the function group CAL for this calibration case.

– Set the required display range in RANGE (function group BASE). The two calibraion echoes selected must be displayed on the screen. Set the range so that the second calibration echo is located on the right edge of the screen. – Select the function group CAL. – Enter the distances of the two calibation echoes in S-REF1 and S-REF2. – Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first calibration echo. – Press

The distances between 2 calibration echoes must be entered as default data. The USM 35X will then carry out a plausibility check, calculate the material velocity and the probe delay, and automatically set the parameters.

– The recording of the first calibration echo is confirmed by the message “Echo is recorded”, and the function CAL indicates the value 1. – Move the gate to the second calibration echo. – Press

Krautkramer USM 35X

to record the first calibration echo.

to record the second calibration echo.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-19

Operation


Case B: With unknown material velocity

Calibration process

Use the semiautomatic calibration function of the USM 35X via the function group CAL for this calibration case.

– Set the required display range in RANGE (function group BASE). The two calibraion echoes selected must be displayed on the screen. Set the range so that the second calibration echo is located on the right edge of the screen. – Select the function group CAL. – Enter the distances of the two calibation echoes in S-REF1 and S-REF2. – Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first calibration echo. – Press

The distances between 2 calibration echoes must be entered as default data. The USM 35X will then carry out a plausibility check, calculate the material velocity and the probe delay, and automatically set the parameters.

– The recording of the first calibration echo is confirmed by the message “Echo is recorded”, and the function CAL indicates the value 1. – Move the gate to the second calibration echo. – Press

Krautkramer USM 35X


Issue 01, 04/2005


5-19

Operation


The correct calibration is confirmed by the message “Calibration is done”. The USM 35X will now automatically determine the sound velocity and the probe delay and set the corresponding functions accordingly. The value of the function CAL jumps back to 0.

Example – Enter the distances (thicknesses) of the two calibration lines S-REF1 (20 mm) and S-REF2 (40 mm).

H Note: If the instrument is not able to carry out any valid calibration on the basis of the input values and the echoes recorded, a corresponding error message is displayed. In that case, please check the values of your calibration lines and repeat the process of recording the calibration echoes.

5-20

– Position the gate on the first calibration echo. – Press

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


Krautkramer USM 35X


The correct calibration is confirmed by the message “Calibration is done”. The USM 35X will now automatically determine the sound velocity and the probe delay and set the corresponding functions accordingly. The value of the function CAL jumps back to 0.

Example – Enter the distances (thicknesses) of the two calibration lines S-REF1 (20 mm) and S-REF2 (40 mm).

H Note: If the instrument is not able to carry out any valid calibration on the basis of the input values and the echoes recorded, a corresponding error message is displayed. In that case, please check the values of your calibration lines and repeat the process of recording the calibration echoes.

5-20

– Position the gate on the first calibration echo. – Press

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


– Position the gate on the second calibration echo:

Calibration with dual-element (TR) probes Dual-element (TR) probes are especially used for wall thickness measurement. The following peculiarities must be taken into account when using these probes: Echo flank

– Press

.

The second echo is stored, the calibration is carried out, and the CAL function is reset to 0. The valid calibration is briefly confirmed and carried out. If you select the function group BASE, you can read the material velocity and probe delay.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Most dual-element (TR) probes have a roof angle (transducer elements with inclined orientation toward the test surface). This causes mode conversions both at beam index (sound entry into the material) and at the reflection from the backwall, which can result in very jagged echoes. V-path error Dual-element (TR) probes produce a v-shaped sound path from the pulser via the reflection from the backwall to the receiver element. This so-called “V-path error” affects the measuring accuracy. You should therefore choose two wall thicknesses that cover the expected thickness measurement range for the calibration. In this way, the V-path error can be corrected to the greatest possible extent.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-21

Operation


– Position the gate on the second calibration echo:

Calibration with dual-element (TR) probes Dual-element (TR) probes are especially used for wall thickness measurement. The following peculiarities must be taken into account when using these probes: Echo flank

– Press

.

The second echo is stored, the calibration is carried out, and the CAL function is reset to 0. The valid calibration is briefly confirmed and carried out. If you select the function group BASE, you can read the material velocity and probe delay.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Most dual-element (TR) probes have a roof angle (transducer elements with inclined orientation toward the test surface). This causes mode conversions both at beam index (sound entry into the material) and at the reflection from the backwall, which can result in very jagged echoes. V-path error Dual-element (TR) probes produce a v-shaped sound path from the pulser via the reflection from the backwall to the receiver element. This so-called “V-path error” affects the measuring accuracy. You should therefore choose two wall thicknesses that cover the expected thickness measurement range for the calibration. In this way, the V-path error can be corrected to the greatest possible extent.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-21

Operation


Higher material velocity Due to the V-path error, a higher material velocity than that of the test material is given during calibration, especially with small thicknesses. This is typical of dualelement (TR) probes and serves for compensation of the V-path error. With small wall thicknesses, the above-described effect leads to an echo amplitude drop which has to be especially taken into account with thicknesses less than 2 mm/0.08". A stepped reference block having different wall thicknesses is required for calibration. The wall thicknesses must be selected so that they cover the expected readings. Calibration process: We recommend to use the semiautomatic calibration function for the calibration with T/R probes.

– Set the pulser and receiver functions according to the probe used and the test application. – Set the function TOF (function group MEAS) to flank. – Vary the gain so that the highest echo reaches approximately the full screen height. – Set the gate threshold to the required height for measuring the sound paths at the echo flanks. – Select the function group CAL. – Enter the distances of the two calibration echoes in S-REF1 and S-REF2. – Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first calibration echo. – Press


– Set the required test range.

– Couple the probe to the calibration block containing the second calibration line, and set the height so that it’s about as high as the first calibration echo.

– Increase the probe delay (P-DELAY) until the two calibration lines are displayed within the range.

– Move the gate to the second calibration echo.

5-22

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Higher material velocity Due to the V-path error, a higher material velocity than that of the test material is given during calibration, especially with small thicknesses. This is typical of dualelement (TR) probes and serves for compensation of the V-path error. With small wall thicknesses, the above-described effect leads to an echo amplitude drop which has to be especially taken into account with thicknesses less than 2 mm/0.08". A stepped reference block having different wall thicknesses is required for calibration. The wall thicknesses must be selected so that they cover the expected readings. Calibration process: We recommend to use the semiautomatic calibration function for the calibration with T/R probes.

– Set the pulser and receiver functions according to the probe used and the test application. – Set the function TOF (function group MEAS) to flank. – Vary the gain so that the highest echo reaches approximately the full screen height. – Set the gate threshold to the required height for measuring the sound paths at the echo flanks. – Select the function group CAL. – Enter the distances of the two calibration echoes in S-REF1 and S-REF2. – Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first calibration echo. – Press


– Set the required test range.

– Couple the probe to the calibration block containing the second calibration line, and set the height so that it’s about as high as the first calibration echo.

– Increase the probe delay (P-DELAY) until the two calibration lines are displayed within the range.

– Move the gate to the second calibration echo.

5-22

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


– Press


The correct calibration is confirmed by the message “Calibration is done”. The material velocity and probe delay are set. The value of the CAL function goes back to 0. – If necessary, check the calibration on one or several known calibration lines, e.g. using the stepped reference block VW.

5.8 Measuring General notes Please pay attention to the following notes when measuring with the USM 35X. • Condition for measurements is the correct instrument calibration (sound velocity, probe delay). • All amplitude measurements are carried out at the highest or the first signal in the gate.

H Note: Always keep in mind that the measured value is determined at the intersection point of gate and echo flank when the function TOF was set to flank. A correct setting of the echo height and gate threshold is therefore decisive for accurate calibration and measurement! Calibrations or measurements in the peak mode are mostly not possible when using dual-element (TR) probes. As the echoes are often very broad and jagged, a clear echo peak cannot always be found in these cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X

• All distance measurements are carried out at the intersection point of gate and the first echo flank (TOF = flank or jflank), or at the peak of the highest echo (TOF = peak). • If the echo amplitudes do not succeed 5 % screen height all sound path and amplitude measurements will be suppressed. Thus, rapidly changing random measurements caused by the instrument’s background noise are avoided.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


– Press


The correct calibration is confirmed by the message “Calibration is done”. The material velocity and probe delay are set. The value of the CAL function goes back to 0. – If necessary, check the calibration on one or several known calibration lines, e.g. using the stepped reference block VW.

5.8 Measuring General notes Please pay attention to the following notes when measuring with the USM 35X. • Condition for measurements is the correct instrument calibration (sound velocity, probe delay). • All amplitude measurements are carried out at the highest or the first signal in the gate.

H Note: Always keep in mind that the measured value is determined at the intersection point of gate and echo flank when the function TOF was set to flank. A correct setting of the echo height and gate threshold is therefore decisive for accurate calibration and measurement! Calibrations or measurements in the peak mode are mostly not possible when using dual-element (TR) probes. As the echoes are often very broad and jagged, a clear echo peak cannot always be found in these cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X

5-23

• All distance measurements are carried out at the intersection point of gate and the first echo flank (TOF = flank or jflank), or at the peak of the highest echo (TOF = peak). • If the echo amplitudes do not succeed 5 % screen height all sound path and amplitude measurements will be suppressed. Thus, rapidly changing random measurements caused by the instrument’s background noise are avoided.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-23

Operation

Measuring

The following example shows the dependency of distance measurement on the echo waveform, i.e. on the height of the gate threshold and thus on the selection of the intersection point at the signal. H Note: The point of amplitude measurement is marked with a small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar. The point of distance measurement is marked with a small downward triangle.

Gate threshold at 80 % measured sound path: 24.91 mm

Gate threshold at 20 % measured sound path: 24.44 mm 5-24

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Measuring

The following example shows the dependency of distance measurement on the echo waveform, i.e. on the height of the gate threshold and thus on the selection of the intersection point at the signal. H Note: The point of amplitude measurement is marked with a small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar. The point of distance measurement is marked with a small downward triangle.

Gate threshold at 80 % measured sound path: 24.91 mm

Gate threshold at 20 % measured sound path: 24.44 mm 5-24

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Measurement of dB difference (function group REF)

5.9 Measurement of dB difference (function group REF) You can evaluate reflector echoes by means of reference echoes. The function group REF makes all functions for the echo comparison between a reflector echo and a reference echo available to you.

H Note: Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD (function group CFG2), one of the function groups AWS, DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at this point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General configuration. You will find the following function:

– If required, go to the second operating level.

REFECHO Storing or deleting the reference echo

– Select the function group REF.

REFMOD

Activating the measurement of dB difference

aSTART

Positioning the A gate

The functions are described in the order in which you need them during your work.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-25

Operation


5.9 Measurement of dB difference (function group REF) You can evaluate reflector echoes by means of reference echoes. The function group REF makes all functions for the echo comparison between a reflector echo and a reference echo available to you.

H Note: Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD (function group CFG2), one of the function groups AWS, DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at this point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General configuration. You will find the following function:


REFECHO Storing or deleting the reference echo

– Select the function group REF.

REFMOD

Activating the measurement of dB difference

aSTART

Positioning the A gate


Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-25

Operation


Recording a reference echo Before using the measurement of dB difference, you have to first record a reference echo.

A Attention: When recording a reference echo, an already stored reference echo is overwritten after a corresponding warning. – Peak the reference echo according to the test specification. – Position the A gate over the reference echo using the function aSTART. – Select the function REFECHO.

Deleting a reference echo

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob upward in order to store the echo in gate A as a reference echo.

You can delete stored reference echoes.

– If necessary, confirm the warning message in order to overwrite a stored reference echo.

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward in order to delete the reference echo.

The reference echo is now recorded. An inverted R is shown in the measurement line. 5-26

– Select the function REFECHO.

– If necessary, confirm the warning message in order to delete the stored reference echo.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recording a reference echo Before using the measurement of dB difference, you have to first record a reference echo.

A Attention: When recording a reference echo, an already stored reference echo is overwritten after a corresponding warning. – Peak the reference echo according to the test specification. – Position the A gate over the reference echo using the function aSTART. – Select the function REFECHO.

Deleting a reference echo

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob upward in order to store the echo in gate A as a reference echo.

You can delete stored reference echoes.

– If necessary, confirm the warning message in order to overwrite a stored reference echo.

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward in order to delete the reference echo.

The reference echo is now recorded. An inverted R is shown in the measurement line. 5-26

– Select the function REFECHO.

– If necessary, confirm the warning message in order to delete the stored reference echo.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Measurement of dB difference(function group REF)

Echo comparison You can compare the echo of any reflector of your choice with the reference echo. The displayed result is the dB difference of the two echoes. H Note: The dB difference is independent of any possible gain variation. – Choose Ha dB or Hb dB as measured value. – Position the A gate over the echo. – Select the function REFMOD. – Activate the function by means of the right-hand rotary knob. The dB difference between the reference echo and the reflector echo is now displayed as the measured value.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-27

Operation

Measurement of dB difference(function group REF)

Echo comparison You can compare the echo of any reflector of your choice with the reference echo. The displayed result is the dB difference of the two echoes. H Note: The dB difference is independent of any possible gain variation. – Choose Ha dB or Hb dB as measured value. – Position the A gate over the echo. – Select the function REFMOD. – Activate the function by means of the right-hand rotary knob. The dB difference between the reference echo and the reflector echo is now displayed as the measured value.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-27

Operation

Classification of welds (function group AWS)

5.10 Classification of welds (function group AWS)

H Note:

You can rate flaws in welds according to the specification AWS D1.1. You will find the corresponding functions in the function group AWS. – If necessary, change to the second operation level. – Select the function group AWS.

Double assignment of the function INDICA/aSTART. Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle between the functions. H Note: Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD (function group CFG2), one of the function groups REF, DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at this point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General configuration.

Rating of welds according to AWS The rating of flaws in welds according to the AWS specifications is based on an evaluation of the signal amplitude. In this process, the echo amplitude of the flaw echo is compared with the echo amplitude of a known reference reflector. In addition, the sound attenuation in the workpiece is also taken into consideration. The result is a dB value which is called flaw rating. The flaw rating D is calculated according to the formula:

5-28

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.10 Classification of welds (function group AWS)

H Note:

You can rate flaws in welds according to the specification AWS D1.1. You will find the corresponding functions in the function group AWS. – If necessary, change to the second operation level. – Select the function group AWS.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Double assignment of the function INDICA/aSTART. Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle between the functions. H Note: Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD (function group CFG2), one of the function groups REF, DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at this point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General configuration.

Rating of welds according to AWS The rating of flaws in welds according to the AWS specifications is based on an evaluation of the signal amplitude. In this process, the echo amplitude of the flaw echo is compared with the echo amplitude of a known reference reflector. In addition, the sound attenuation in the workpiece is also taken into consideration. The result is a dB value which is called flaw rating. The flaw rating D is calculated according to the formula:

5-28

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


D=A–B–C

H Notes:

with:

Make sure that all instrument options for the special test are calibrated before starting with the rating according to AWS.

• A = Indication (in dB) Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum flaw echo is at 50 % (±5 %) echo height • B = Reference (in dB) Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum reference echo (1.5 mm side-drilled hole from the reference block 1) is at 50 % (±5 %) echo height • C = Attenuation (in dB) This value is calculated according to the formula C = 0.079 dB/mm (s – 25.4 mm). With s = sound path of the flaw echo. The sound attenuation correction is automatically calculated and displayed by the instrument. For sound paths smaller than or equal to 25.4 mm (1 inch), the value is set to zero.

Pay attention to peaking an echo with an amplitude between 45 % and 55 % screen height. A rating is not possible with other amplitudes.

– Apply couplant, and couple the probe to the reference block 1. Peak the echo from the 1.5 mm sidedrilled hole. – Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate on the reference echo.

– Vary the gain so that the reference echo is displayed at 50 % screen height. – Choose the function REFRNCE, and confirm the choice in order to save the reference gain.

• D = D 1.1 Rating (in dB) This is the result of the evaluation according to AWS. The evaluation is carried out in the USM 35X according to the formula indicated above. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-29

Operation


D=A–B–C

H Notes:

with:

Make sure that all instrument options for the special test are calibrated before starting with the rating according to AWS.

• A = Indication (in dB) Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum flaw echo is at 50 % (±5 %) echo height • B = Reference (in dB) Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum reference echo (1.5 mm side-drilled hole from the reference block 1) is at 50 % (±5 %) echo height • C = Attenuation (in dB) This value is calculated according to the formula C = 0.079 dB/mm (s – 25.4 mm). With s = sound path of the flaw echo. The sound attenuation correction is automatically calculated and displayed by the instrument. For sound paths smaller than or equal to 25.4 mm (1 inch), the value is set to zero.

Pay attention to peaking an echo with an amplitude between 45 % and 55 % screen height. A rating is not possible with other amplitudes.

– Apply couplant, and couple the probe to the reference block 1. Peak the echo from the 1.5 mm sidedrilled hole. – Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate on the reference echo.

– Vary the gain so that the reference echo is displayed at 50 % screen height. – Choose the function REFRNCE, and confirm the choice in order to save the reference gain.

• D = D 1.1 Rating (in dB) This is the result of the evaluation according to AWS. The evaluation is carried out in the USM 35X according to the formula indicated above. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-29

Operation


– Save the current gain using the function INDICA. The current gain is saved. The USM 35X will automatically determine the values of the AWS variables C and D. You can then evaluate the rating D using the corresponding requirements from AWS.

– Couple the probe to the test object in order to evaluate a flaw echo. – Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate on the flaw echo.

– Vary the gain so that the flaw echo is displayed at 50 % screen height. – Go to the function group AWS.

5-30

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


– Save the current gain using the function INDICA. The current gain is saved. The USM 35X will automatically determine the values of the AWS variables C and D. You can then evaluate the rating D using the corresponding requirements from AWS.

– Couple the probe to the test object in order to evaluate a flaw echo. – Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate on the flaw echo.

– Vary the gain so that the flaw echo is displayed at 50 % screen height. – Go to the function group AWS.

5-30

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG)

5.11 Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) In the function group TRIG you will find the functions for setting the flaw position calculation when using anglebeam probes. – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group TRIG.

H Note: Double assignment of the function X-VALU/COLOR. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . The functions in the group TRIG enable to automatically calculate the (reduced) projection distance and the real depth of the flaw in addition to the sound path S, and to digitally display them in the measurement line. • Projection distance PD: distance of probe index (sound exit point) from the position of the flaw, projected on the surface • Reduced projection distance rPD: distance of the probe’s leading face from the position of the flaw, projected on the surface • Depth d: Distance between flaw position and surface

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.11 Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) In the function group TRIG you will find the functions for setting the flaw position calculation when using anglebeam probes. – If required, go to the first operating level. – Select the function group TRIG.

5-31

H Note: Double assignment of the function X-VALU/COLOR. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key . The functions in the group TRIG enable to automatically calculate the (reduced) projection distance and the real depth of the flaw in addition to the sound path S, and to digitally display them in the measurement line. • Projection distance PD: distance of probe index (sound exit point) from the position of the flaw, projected on the surface • Reduced projection distance rPD: distance of the probe’s leading face from the position of the flaw, projected on the surface • Depth d: Distance between flaw position and surface

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-31

Operation


ANGLE (Angle of incidence) The ANGLE function enables you to adjust the angle of incidence of your probe for the material used. This value is required for the automatic calculation of the flaw position. Adjustment range: 0° ... 90° – Select the ANGLE function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting. When using angle-beam probes, the instrument can additionally calculate the sound path section or socalled leg L up to the next reflection point. This sound path section or leg can be displayed as the measured value La, Lb, or Lc.

X-VALUE (X-value of the probe) The function X-VALUE enables you to set the X-value (distance between the probe’s leading face and probe index/sound exit point) of the probe used. This value is required for the automatic calculation of the reduced projection distance. Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 mm/0 ... 40" – Select the function X-VALUE. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

5-32

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


ANGLE (Angle of incidence) The ANGLE function enables you to adjust the angle of incidence of your probe for the material used. This value is required for the automatic calculation of the flaw position. Adjustment range: 0° ... 90° – Select the ANGLE function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting. When using angle-beam probes, the instrument can additionally calculate the sound path section or socalled leg L up to the next reflection point. This sound path section or leg can be displayed as the measured value La, Lb, or Lc.

X-VALUE (X-value of the probe) The function X-VALUE enables you to set the X-value (distance between the probe’s leading face and probe index/sound exit point) of the probe used. This value is required for the automatic calculation of the reduced projection distance. Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 mm/0 ... 40" – Select the function X-VALUE. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

5-32

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


COLOR

– Select the THICKNE function.

To make the orientation easier, the instrument is able to display the different sound path sections or legs in different ways. You can choose between two display modes:

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

• 1 – The A-scan is shown in another color in every leg. – Leg 1 in magenta – Leg 2 in blue – Leg 3 in magenta

You will need the DIAMET function for tests on circular curved surfaces, for example when testing longitudinally welded tubes. In order to make the USM 35X carry out the corresponding correction of (reduced) projection distance and depth, you should enter the outside diameter of your test object in this function.

• 2 – The legs are shown as background shadings. • off – No legs are displayed. – Select the function COLOR. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required mode.

If you plan to carry out the flaw position calculation for plane-parallel (flat) test objects, the DIAMET function should be set to flat. Adjustment range: • 10 ... 2000 mm/0.4 ... 800"

THICKNE (Material thickness) Use the THICKNE function to set the material’s wall thickness. This value is required for the automatic calculation of the real depth.

• flat – Select the DIAMET function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

Adjustment range: 1 ... 1000 mm/0.05 ... 400" Krautkramer USM 35X

DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test object)

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-33

Operation


COLOR

– Select the THICKNE function.

To make the orientation easier, the instrument is able to display the different sound path sections or legs in different ways. You can choose between two display modes:

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

• 1 – The A-scan is shown in another color in every leg. – Leg 1 in magenta – Leg 2 in blue – Leg 3 in magenta

You will need the DIAMET function for tests on circular curved surfaces, for example when testing longitudinally welded tubes. In order to make the USM 35X carry out the corresponding correction of (reduced) projection distance and depth, you should enter the outside diameter of your test object in this function.

• 2 – The legs are shown as background shadings. • off – No legs are displayed. – Select the function COLOR. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required mode.

Use the THICKNE function to set the material’s wall thickness. This value is required for the automatic calculation of the real depth.

Krautkramer USM 35X

If you plan to carry out the flaw position calculation for plane-parallel (flat) test objects, the DIAMET function should be set to flat. Adjustment range: • 10 ... 2000 mm/0.4 ... 800"

THICKNE (Material thickness)

Adjustment range: 1 ... 1000 mm/0.05 ... 400"

DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test object)

• flat – Select the DIAMET function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-33

Operation

Data saving (function group MEM)

5.12 Data saving (function group MEM) You will find all functions for storing, recalling and deleting complete data sets in the function group MEM.

A data set contains all instrument settings as well as the A-scan. This means that whenever you recall a stored data set, your instrument is again set up exactly the same as it was at the moment when the data set was stored. This makes each one of your tests reproducible.


You will find the following functions:

– Select the function group MEM.

SET-#

selecting number of a data set

RECALL

recalling a stored data set

STORE

storing a data set

DELETE

deleting a data set


5-34

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


5.12 Data saving (function group MEM) You will find all functions for storing, recalling and deleting complete data sets in the function group MEM.

A data set contains all instrument settings as well as the A-scan. This means that whenever you recall a stored data set, your instrument is again set up exactly the same as it was at the moment when the data set was stored. This makes each one of your tests reproducible.


You will find the following functions:

– Select the function group MEM.

SET-#

selecting number of a data set

RECALL

recalling a stored data set

STORE

storing a data set

DELETE

deleting a data set


5-34

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Storing a data set

All active entries in the information table (TESTINF) are automatically allocated to the data set being stored (see chapter 5.13 Dataset management).

You can save your current setup to a data set. – Select the function SET-#. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number where you would want to store the current data set (1 to 200). – Select the function STORE.

An occupied data set is marked with an asterisk (*) before the data set number. You can delete these data sets if you no longer need them. – Select the function SET-#.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The USM 35X stores the current data set. When the storage process is completed, the function STORE is automatically reset to off.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of the data set that you want to delete. – Select the function DELETE. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The measurement line will then prompt: Delete data set?

H Note: The asterisk (*) before a selected data set number indicates that this data set is already occupied. It is not possible to overwrite an occupied data set; select another data set which is still empty, or delete the occupied data set. To avoid loss of data e.g. in case of a software update you should save the data sets to a PC.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Deleting a data set

– Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one more time (all other keys would abort the process). The data set is now deleted; the asterisk preceding the data set number is no longer there. The function DELETE is automatically reset to off.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-35

Operation


Storing a data set

All active entries in the information table (TESTINF) are automatically allocated to the data set being stored (see chapter 5.13 Dataset management).

You can save your current setup to a data set. – Select the function SET-#. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number where you would want to store the current data set (1 to 200). – Select the function STORE.

An occupied data set is marked with an asterisk (*) before the data set number. You can delete these data sets if you no longer need them. – Select the function SET-#.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The USM 35X stores the current data set. When the storage process is completed, the function STORE is automatically reset to off.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of the data set that you want to delete. – Select the function DELETE. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The measurement line will then prompt: Delete data set?

H Note: The asterisk (*) before a selected data set number indicates that this data set is already occupied. It is not possible to overwrite an occupied data set; select another data set which is still empty, or delete the occupied data set. To avoid loss of data e.g. in case of a software update you should save the data sets to a PC.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Deleting a data set

– Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one more time (all other keys would abort the process). The data set is now deleted; the asterisk preceding the data set number is no longer there. The function DELETE is automatically reset to off.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-35

Operation


Deleting all data set You can delete all data sets if you no longer need them. – Select the function DELETE.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The measurement line will then prompt: Delete all data sets? – Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one more time (all other keys would abort the process). All data sets are now deleted. The function DELETE is automatically reset to off.

Recalling a stored data set You can recall a stored data set; your instrument will then be provided with all the test-relevant technical features that existed at the moment of the setup. A frozen display of the stored A-scan appears. H Note:

A Attention:

Double assignment of the function DELETE/DELALL. Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle between the functions.

If a saved data set is loaded, the current instrument setup is lost. If necessary, save the current instrument setup to a new data set before loading a saved data set. – Select the function SET-#.

5-36

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


Deleting all data set You can delete all data sets if you no longer need them. – Select the function DELETE.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The measurement line will then prompt: Delete all data sets? – Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one more time (all other keys would abort the process). All data sets are now deleted. The function DELETE is automatically reset to off.

Recalling a stored data set You can recall a stored data set; your instrument will then be provided with all the test-relevant technical features that existed at the moment of the setup. A frozen display of the stored A-scan appears. H Note:

A Attention:

Double assignment of the function DELETE/DELALL. Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle between the functions.

If a saved data set is loaded, the current instrument setup is lost. If necessary, save the current instrument setup to a new data set before loading a saved data set. – Select the function SET-#.

5-36

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of the data set that you want to recall. – Select the function RECALL. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The measurement line will then prompt: Recall data set? – Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one more time (all other keys would abort the process). The data set is now loaded and the current setup is overwritten. When the loading process is completed, the function RECALL is automatically reset to off. H Note: The gate for surveying the echo can be moved in the recalled A-scan. However, as the evaluation is made in the frozen A-scan, the measurement resolution is only 0.5 % of the adjusted calibration range.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-37

Operation


– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of the data set that you want to recall. – Select the function RECALL. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The measurement line will then prompt: Recall data set? – Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one more time (all other keys would abort the process). The data set is now loaded and the current setup is overwritten. When the loading process is completed, the function RECALL is automatically reset to off. H Note: The gate for surveying the echo can be moved in the recalled A-scan. However, as the evaluation is made in the frozen A-scan, the measurement resolution is only 0.5 % of the adjusted calibration range.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-37

Operation

Dataset management (function group DATA)

5.13 Dataset management (function group DATA)

The functions in the function group DATA enable you to easily manage the data sets stored in the USM 35X. The following functions are available:

The USM 35X offers comprehensive functions for an easy dataset management.

TESTINF

You can save a lot of additional information for every data set, e.g. data on the test object, on the flaw detected, or comments.

PREVIEW

In this dataset preview you will see the A-scan, the dataset name and the storage date of each data set.

DIR

This function enables you to display a list of all stored data sets, including the corresponding dataset names.

SETTING

This is where you will see a list of functions including all settings of the current data set.

– If required, go to the second operating level. – Select the function group DATA.

5-38

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


5.13 Dataset management (function group DATA)

The functions in the function group DATA enable you to easily manage the data sets stored in the USM 35X. The following functions are available:

The USM 35X offers comprehensive functions for an easy dataset management.

TESTINF

You can save a lot of additional information for every data set, e.g. data on the test object, on the flaw detected, or comments.

PREVIEW

In this dataset preview you will see the A-scan, the dataset name and the storage date of each data set.

DIR

This function enables you to display a list of all stored data sets, including the corresponding dataset names.

SETTING

This is where you will see a list of functions including all settings of the current data set.

– If required, go to the second operating level. – Select the function group DATA.

5-38

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


TESTINF (Storing additional information)

You can

For every data set, you can store additional information which will support you in the easy management of the data sets. You have 9 fields at your disposal for this purpose.

• save the current settings – together with the edited additional information – at a new and still empty dataset number (analogously to function STORE in the function group MEM),

You can enter a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters in the following fields:

• subsequently enter and save additional information for an already stored data set,

DATNAME

Dataset name

OBJECT

Object description

• overwrite the already saved additional information of a data set.

FLAWIND

Flaw indication

OPERAT

Name of the person carrying out the test

SURFACE

Surface quality

– Use

COMMENT Comments

Flaw length

X-POS

x-position coordinate

Y-POS

y-position coordinate

Krautkramer USM 35X

(INFO 3) and

to select the field SET-#.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to view the additional information for other data sets and to edit this information if required.

You can enter numerical values in these fields: FLAWLEN

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select and acitvate the function TESTINF. The table will now show the additional information saved for the currently selected data set.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-39

Operation


TESTINF (Storing additional information)

You can

For every data set, you can store additional information which will support you in the easy management of the data sets. You have 9 fields at your disposal for this purpose.

• save the current settings – together with the edited additional information – at a new and still empty dataset number (analogously to function STORE in the function group MEM),

You can enter a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters in the following fields:

• subsequently enter and save additional information for an already stored data set,

DATNAME

Dataset name

OBJECT

Object description

• overwrite the already saved additional information of a data set.

FLAWIND

Flaw indication

OPERAT

Name of the person carrying out the test

SURFACE

Surface quality

COMMENT Comments You can enter numerical values in these fields: FLAWLEN

Flaw length

X-POS

x-position coordinate

Y-POS

y-position coordinate

Krautkramer USM 35X

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select and acitvate the function TESTINF. The table will now show the additional information saved for the currently selected data set. – Use

(INFO 3) and

to select the field SET-#.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to view the additional information for other data sets and to edit this information if required.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-39

Operation


H Note:

Editing additional information

All stored data are displayed for data sets which are already occupied. An occupied data set is marked with an asterisk (*) before the data set number. If you have selected an empty data set, the field data of the previously displayed data set are automatically transferred. However, the data in the numerical fields FLAWLEN, X-POS and Y-POS are deleted. This means that you only have to edit the variable fields in test applications which include continuous saving of results. All alphanumerical field data are automatically transferred but can also be edited if necessary.

You can edit all items with additional information.

A Attention: As long as the field data edited in this table have not been saved, the previous entries remain valid. Please keep this in mind, e.g. before selecting a new dataset number: all changes in the current data set are lost! – Select the required field. – Use the left-hand rotary knob to mark the required character position. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the character for this position. You only need the right-hand rotary knob to enter the numerical values in FLAWLEN, X-POS and Y-POS. H Note: You cannot edit the field SET-#. The number of the current data set is displayed here.

5-40

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


H Note:

Editing additional information

All stored data are displayed for data sets which are already occupied. An occupied data set is marked with an asterisk (*) before the data set number. If you have selected an empty data set, the field data of the previously displayed data set are automatically transferred. However, the data in the numerical fields FLAWLEN, X-POS and Y-POS are deleted. This means that you only have to edit the variable fields in test applications which include continuous saving of results. All alphanumerical field data are automatically transferred but can also be edited if necessary.

You can edit all items with additional information.

A Attention: As long as the field data edited in this table have not been saved, the previous entries remain valid. Please keep this in mind, e.g. before selecting a new dataset number: all changes in the current data set are lost! – Select the required field. – Use the left-hand rotary knob to mark the required character position. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the character for this position. You only need the right-hand rotary knob to enter the numerical values in FLAWLEN, X-POS and Y-POS. H Note: You cannot edit the field SET-#. The number of the current data set is displayed here.

5-40

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Storing additional information

PREVIEW (Dataset preview)

A Attention:

This function enables you to view the A-scans of all stored data sets.

If you have edited already existing additional information, all previous additional information is overwritten when the data are stored.

– Select the PREVIEW function.

– Select the field STO-INF. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set this function on. The currently displayed data of the fields are now stored. The function STO-INF is automatically reset to off at the end of data storage. – If necessary, press one of the keys , or to go back to the A-scan without storing the data.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on. The A-scan and the name of the first data set are displayed. Viewing other data sets: – Select the SET-# function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the number of the required data set. – Select the RECALL function.

H Note: In the case of previously empty data sets, all instrument settings and the current A-scan are stored simultaneously with the edited field data. Only the edited field data are stored for the previously occupied data sets. Previously stored instrument settings and A-scans are kept. Krautkramer USM 35X

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on. The selected data set is displayed. – If necessary, confirm the message using the corresponding key . – If necessary, press one of the keys , go back to the currently active A-scan.

or

Issue 01, 04/2005

to

5-41

Operation


Storing additional information

PREVIEW (Dataset preview)

A Attention:

This function enables you to view the A-scans of all stored data sets.

If you have edited already existing additional information, all previous additional information is overwritten when the data are stored.

– Select the PREVIEW function.

– Select the field STO-INF. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set this function on. The currently displayed data of the fields are now stored. The function STO-INF is automatically reset to off at the end of data storage. – If necessary, press one of the keys , or to go back to the A-scan without storing the data.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on. The A-scan and the name of the first data set are displayed. Viewing other data sets: – Select the SET-# function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the number of the required data set. – Select the RECALL function.

H Note: In the case of previously empty data sets, all instrument settings and the current A-scan are stored simultaneously with the edited field data. Only the edited field data are stored for the previously occupied data sets. Previously stored instrument settings and A-scans are kept. Krautkramer USM 35X

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on. The selected data set is displayed. – If necessary, confirm the message using the corresponding key . – If necessary, press one of the keys , go back to the currently active A-scan.

Issue 01, 04/2005

or

to

5-41

Operation


DIR (Dataset directory)

SETTING (Function list)

This function enables you to get an overview of all stored data sets, including their names and numbers.

This function provides you with an overview of all set functions of the current data set.

– Select the DIR function.

– Select the SETTING function.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on. The list of the currently set functions is displayed.

The directory list of the stored data sets is displayed (dataset numbers and names). The display shows 12 data sets at a time. Occupied data sets are marked with an asterisk (*).

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other lines displayed. The list is advanced by one line each. – If necessary, press one of the keys , go back to the currently active A-scan.

or

to

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other data sets displayed. The list always advances by one line each. – If necessary, press one of the keys , go back to the currently active A-scan.

or

5-42

to

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


DIR (Dataset directory)

SETTING (Function list)

This function enables you to get an overview of all stored data sets, including their names and numbers.

This function provides you with an overview of all set functions of the current data set.

– Select the DIR function.

– Select the SETTING function.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on. The list of the currently set functions is displayed.

The directory list of the stored data sets is displayed (dataset numbers and names). The display shows 12 data sets at a time. Occupied data sets are marked with an asterisk (*).

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other lines displayed. The list is advanced by one line each. – If necessary, press one of the keys , go back to the currently active A-scan.

or

to

– Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other data sets displayed. The list always advances by one line each. – If necessary, press one of the keys , go back to the currently active A-scan.

5-42

or

to

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

– If required, go to the third operating level. – Select the function group MEAS.

Besides the default settings for the instrument operation, you have to configure the USM 35X for calibration and test tasks. You will find the corresponding functions in the function groups MEAS, MSEL and LCD. In addition, you have to check the current time and date, and set them if required, so that they are correctly stored together with the test results. Please look up the function groups CFG1 and CFG2 for more functions for the general instrument setup (please refer to chapter 5.15 General configuration).

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-43

Operation


5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

– If required, go to the third operating level. – Select the function group MEAS.

Besides the default settings for the instrument operation, you have to configure the USM 35X for calibration and test tasks. You will find the corresponding functions in the function groups MEAS, MSEL and LCD. In addition, you have to check the current time and date, and set them if required, so that they are correctly stored together with the test results. Please look up the function groups CFG1 and CFG2 for more functions for the general instrument setup (please refer to chapter 5.15 General configuration).

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-43

Operation


TOF (Selecting the measuring point) The sound path measurement in the calibration process or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends on the selected measuring point which can be adjusted either to flank, to peak or to jflank in the USM 35X.

When adjusted to flank or jflank the sound path measurement is made at the point of intersection of the monitor gate with the rising flank of the highest echo in the gate.

The point of amplitude measurement is marked by a small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar. The point of distance measurement is marked by a small downward triangle. H Note: While DAC, TCG or JISDAC is active you can change the TOF mode from peak to flank.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm amplitude: 94 %

A Attention: The highest echo in the gate does not have to be the echo for which the sound path has been measured. This may lead to false echo evaluation! 5-44

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


TOF (Selecting the measuring point) The sound path measurement in the calibration process or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends on the selected measuring point which can be adjusted either to flank, to peak or to jflank in the USM 35X.

When adjusted to flank or jflank the sound path measurement is made at the point of intersection of the monitor gate with the rising flank of the highest echo in the gate.

The point of amplitude measurement is marked by a small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar. The point of distance measurement is marked by a small downward triangle. H Note: While DAC, TCG or JISDAC is active you can change the TOF mode from peak to flank.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm amplitude: 94 %

A Attention: The highest echo in the gate does not have to be the echo for which the sound path has been measured. This may lead to false echo evaluation! 5-44

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


In order to identify the points of measurement and to avoid misinterpretation two indicators were introduced per gate: The first triangle pointing downwards indicates the position of the measured sound path (distance), whereas the triangle pointing upwards marks the position of the measured amplitude.

In TOF mode jflank the sound path measurement is made at the point of intersection of the monitor gate with the rising flank of the first echo in the gate. The amplitude is measured at the maximum of the first echo in the gate even if there are further signals with higher amplitudes in the gate.

In TOF mode peak the sound path and amplitude measurement is made at the maximum of the highest echo in the gate.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm amplitude: 33 % measured soundpath: 19,65 mm amplitude: 95 % Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-45

Operation


In order to identify the points of measurement and to avoid misinterpretation two indicators were introduced per gate: The first triangle pointing downwards indicates the position of the measured sound path (distance), whereas the triangle pointing upwards marks the position of the measured amplitude.

In TOF mode jflank the sound path measurement is made at the point of intersection of the monitor gate with the rising flank of the first echo in the gate. The amplitude is measured at the maximum of the first echo in the gate even if there are further signals with higher amplitudes in the gate.

In TOF mode peak the sound path and amplitude measurement is made at the maximum of the highest echo in the gate.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm amplitude: 33 % measured soundpath: 19,65 mm amplitude: 95 % Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-45

Operation


In principle, the peak measurement should be preferred because the measured distances do not depend on the echo height in that case. However, there are application cases in which the flank measurement is either specified, or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in many tests using dual-element (TR) probes.

A Attention: In any case, the adjustment of the measuring point for calibration and for the subsequent test use must always be identical. Otherwise measurement errors may occur. – Select the TOF function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) You can have a selected reading zoomed in the A-scan display. The following readings can be selected for the zoomed display (in the second column the indication of the readings in the measurement line): Sa Sb Sb-a

Sa Sb ba

Ha % Hb % Ha dB Hb dB R-start R-end La Lb Lc

Ha Hb ha hb Rs Re La Lb Lc

Sound path for gate A Sound path for gate B Difference of single measurements for sound path gate B – gate A Echo height gate A in % screen height Echo height gate B in % screen height Echo height gate A in dB Echo height gate B in dB Range start Range end Number of legs in gate A Number of legs in gate B Number of legs in gate C

Only for flaw position calculation: Da 5-46

Da

Depth for gate A

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


In principle, the peak measurement should be preferred because the measured distances do not depend on the echo height in that case. However, there are application cases in which the flank measurement is either specified, or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in many tests using dual-element (TR) probes.

A Attention: In any case, the adjustment of the measuring point for calibration and for the subsequent test use must always be identical. Otherwise measurement errors may occur. – Select the TOF function. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) You can have a selected reading zoomed in the A-scan display. The following readings can be selected for the zoomed display (in the second column the indication of the readings in the measurement line): Sa Sb Sb-a

Sa Sb ba

Ha % Hb % Ha dB Hb dB R-start R-end La Lb Lc

Ha Hb ha hb Rs Re La Lb Lc

Sound path for gate A Sound path for gate B Difference of single measurements for sound path gate B – gate A Echo height gate A in % screen height Echo height gate B in % screen height Echo height gate A in dB Echo height gate B in dB Range start Range end Number of legs in gate A Number of legs in gate B Number of legs in gate C

Only for flaw position calculation: Da 5-46

Issue 01, 04/2005

Da

Depth for gate A Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Db Pa Pb

Db Pa Pb

Depth for gate B Projection distance for gate A Projection distance for gate B

General:

Ra

Ra

Reduced projection distance for gate A

Rb

Rb

Reduced projection distance for gate B

Alarm

ERS

ER

Equivalent reflector size

Gt dB

Gt

DGS test sensitivity

GrdB

Gr

DGS reference gain (= instrument gain for the reference echo on 80 % screen height)

Only for DGS and DAC: Ha %crv Ca

Echo height gate A in % referred to curve

Hb %crv Cb

Echo height gate B in % referred to curve

DGS-Crv Dc

Diameter of the DGS curve

class

Flaw class according to JIS Z3060-2002

DAC dB db

Choice of gates for alarm triggering: gate A, B or A+B

H Note: If you use the Data Logger option, values for the C gate as well as a few special values for the Data Logger are added to the existing ones, see chapter Option Data Logger.

Only for DGS:

cl

Al

– Select the function S-DISP. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required value for the zoomed display. H Note: You can likewise configure all readings to be displayed below the A-scan at the four corresponding positions. Please refer to Configuring the measurement line.

dB-value by which the DAC gain has been changed related to the reference gain (= instrument gain for the DAC echo on 80 % screen height)

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-47

Operation


Db Pa Pb

Db Pa Pb

Depth for gate B Projection distance for gate A Projection distance for gate B

General:

Ra

Ra

Reduced projection distance for gate A

Rb

Rb

Reduced projection distance for gate B

Alarm

ERS

ER

Equivalent reflector size

Gt dB

Gt

DGS test sensitivity

GrdB

Gr

DGS reference gain (= instrument gain for the reference echo on 80 % screen height)

Only for DGS and DAC: Ha %crv Ca

Echo height gate A in % referred to curve

Hb %crv Cb

Echo height gate B in % referred to curve

DGS-Crv Dc

Diameter of the DGS curve

class

Flaw class according to JIS Z3060-2002

DAC dB db

Choice of gates for alarm triggering: gate A, B or A+B

H Note: If you use the Data Logger option, values for the C gate as well as a few special values for the Data Logger are added to the existing ones, see chapter Option Data Logger.

Only for DGS:

cl

Al

– Select the function S-DISP. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required value for the zoomed display. H Note: You can likewise configure all readings to be displayed below the A-scan at the four corresponding positions. Please refer to Configuring the measurement line.

dB-value by which the DAC gain has been changed related to the reference gain (= instrument gain for the DAC echo on 80 % screen height)

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-47

Operation


MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) The setting of the MAGNIFY function causes a spreading of the gate over the entire display width. You can choose the gate to be used for the magnify function. – Select the function MAGNIFY. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to aGATE or bGATE if you want to spread the range of gate A or B over the entire display range.

A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) This function offers you several options for setting your A-scan. • stndard Normal A-scan setting. The freeze.

key effects a static

H Note: Read chapter 5.12 to learn how to load a saved data set. As a restored data set is displayed with a frozen key first. A-scan, press the • envelop (echo dynamics) The echo envelope is shown as a dotted line additionally to the A-scan. • peak b (maximum display) You can use this function to record and document (as well as to save if required) the peaked, maximum echo display. With the B gate active, the A-scan with the highest echo amplitude (recording of maximum display) is shown as a dotted line additionally to the “live” A-scan when peaking an echo display (in B gate). This A-scan becomes the statically frozen A-scan by pressing the key, and it can then be evaluated accordingly.

• compare (A-scan comparison) You can compare a current echo display with a stored one. The display last stored using – either from the current application or from a stored data set – is displayed in the background as a dotted line. 5-48

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) The setting of the MAGNIFY function causes a spreading of the gate over the entire display width. You can choose the gate to be used for the magnify function. – Select the function MAGNIFY. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to aGATE or bGATE if you want to spread the range of gate A or B over the entire display range.

A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) This function offers you several options for setting your A-scan. • stndard Normal A-scan setting. The freeze.

Krautkramer USM 35X

key effects a static

H Note: Read chapter 5.12 to learn how to load a saved data set. As a restored data set is displayed with a frozen key first. A-scan, press the • envelop (echo dynamics) The echo envelope is shown as a dotted line additionally to the A-scan. • peak b (maximum display) You can use this function to record and document (as well as to save if required) the peaked, maximum echo display. With the B gate active, the A-scan with the highest echo amplitude (recording of maximum display) is shown as a dotted line additionally to the “live” A-scan when peaking an echo display (in B gate). This A-scan becomes the statically frozen A-scan by pressing the key, and it can then be evaluated accordingly.

• compare (A-scan comparison) You can compare a current echo display with a stored one. The display last stored using – either from the current application or from a stored data set – is displayed in the background as a dotted line. 5-48

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


• afreeze/bfreeze (automatic freeze) Whenever you select this function, an echo display connected with the A or B gate will automatically switch over to A-scan freeze (automatic freeze). This setting is especially well suited e.g. for high-temperature measurements, for measurements involving difficult coupling conditions, or for spot weld testing.

Configuring the measurement line The configuration of your measurement line is carried out in the function group MSEL, this means that you can choose the reading for one of the four possible positions of the measurement line for direct measuredvalue display during the test. – If required, go to the third operating level.

H Note:

– Select the function group MSEL.

If you are using a Data Logger option, you also have the function cfreeze (for C gate) at your disposal. – Select the function A-SCAN. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required setting. – Pay attention to the additional information referring to the corresponding setting options (see preceeding page). Functions of the function group MSEL: MEAS-P1 MEAS-P2 MEAS-P3 Measured values at positions 1 to 4 Krautkramer USM 35X

MEAS-P4

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-49

Operation


• afreeze/bfreeze (automatic freeze) Whenever you select this function, an echo display connected with the A or B gate will automatically switch over to A-scan freeze (automatic freeze). This setting is especially well suited e.g. for high-temperature measurements, for measurements involving difficult coupling conditions, or for spot weld testing.

Configuring the measurement line The configuration of your measurement line is carried out in the function group MSEL, this means that you can choose the reading for one of the four possible positions of the measurement line for direct measuredvalue display during the test. – If required, go to the third operating level.

H Note:

– Select the function group MSEL.

If you are using a Data Logger option, you also have the function cfreeze (for C gate) at your disposal. – Select the function A-SCAN. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required setting. – Pay attention to the additional information referring to the corresponding setting options (see preceeding page). Functions of the function group MSEL: MEAS-P1 MEAS-P2 MEAS-P3 Measured values at positions 1 to 4 Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

MEAS-P4

5-49

Operation


All measured values which have also been described for the zoomed display of the function S-DISP are availabe to you at each position.

Setting the display

H Note:

– If required, go to the third operating level.

As an alternative, you can display a scale in the measurement line (ref. function SCALE).

– Select the function group LCD.

In the function group LCD, you will find setting options for the display screen itself and for the echo display.

– Select the function MEAS-P1 to MEAS-P4. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required measured value for each position in the corresponding function.

H Note: Double assignment of the function FILLED/VGA. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

5-50

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


All measured values which have also been described for the zoomed display of the function S-DISP are availabe to you at each position.

Setting the display

H Note:


As an alternative, you can display a scale in the measurement line (ref. function SCALE).

– Select the function group LCD.

In the function group LCD, you will find setting options for the display screen itself and for the echo display.

– Select the function MEAS-P1 to MEAS-P4. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required measured value for each position in the corresponding function.

H Note: Double assignment of the function FILLED/VGA. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

5-50

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


FILLED (Echo display mode)

VGA

The function FILLED toggles between the filled and the normal echo display mode. The filled echo display mode improves the echo perceptibility due to the strong contrast, especially in cases where workpieces are scanned more quickly.

You can switch the VGA output on and off.

H Note: If the function COLOR is active, the filled area is also displayed in different colors. – Select the function FILLED. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on or off.

H Note: You should only switch the VGA output on if you aim to transfer the display contents to an external instrument. If the VGA output is switched off, the current consumption is reduced and the operating time is extended in battery operation. – Select the function VGA. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on or off.

SCHEME You have a choice between four color schemes. The color scheme determines the color of all displays and that of the background. You cannot vary the colors of gates because they are fixed as follows: • Gate A – red • Gate B – green • Gate C – blue Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-51

Operation


FILLED (Echo display mode)

VGA

The function FILLED toggles between the filled and the normal echo display mode. The filled echo display mode improves the echo perceptibility due to the strong contrast, especially in cases where workpieces are scanned more quickly.

You can switch the VGA output on and off.

H Note: If the function COLOR is active, the filled area is also displayed in different colors. – Select the function FILLED. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on or off.

H Note: You should only switch the VGA output on if you aim to transfer the display contents to an external instrument. If the VGA output is switched off, the current consumption is reduced and the operating time is extended in battery operation. – Select the function VGA. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on or off.

SCHEME You have a choice between four color schemes. The color scheme determines the color of all displays and that of the background. You cannot vary the colors of gates because they are fixed as follows: • Gate A – red • Gate B – green • Gate C – blue Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-51

Operation


H Note:

SCALE (Configuring the measurement line)


As an alternative to the measured values, the USM 35X enables to display a scale in the measurement line. The scale gives you an overview of the position of echoes. You have a choice between a dimensionless ten-division scale and a scale showing the real position of the echoes.

– Select the function SCHEME. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required color scheme.

The following settings are possible:

LIGHT (LCD backlight)

• measval Display of measured values

You can choose between a lighting in the economy mode min. and a brighter lighting max. for the display lighting. The economy mode is the default setting.

• snd-pth

Display of sound path scale

• div.

Display of a dimensionless scale

H Note:

– Select the function SCALE.


– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required display mode.

– Select the function LIGHT. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required lighting.

5-52

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


H Note:

SCALE (Configuring the measurement line)


As an alternative to the measured values, the USM 35X enables to display a scale in the measurement line. The scale gives you an overview of the position of echoes. You have a choice between a dimensionless ten-division scale and a scale showing the real position of the echoes.

– Select the function SCHEME. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required color scheme.

The following settings are possible:

LIGHT (LCD backlight)

• measval Display of measured values

You can choose between a lighting in the economy mode min. and a brighter lighting max. for the display lighting. The economy mode is the default setting.

• snd-pth

Display of sound path scale

• div.

Display of a dimensionless scale

H Note:

– Select the function SCALE.


– Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required display mode.

– Select the function LIGHT. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required lighting.

5-52

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

General configuration

5.15 General configuration More functions for the basic configuration of the USM 35X may be found in the function groups CFG1 and CFG2. – If required, go to the third operating level. – Select the function group CFG1 or CFG2.

Functions of CFG1 Dialog language Unit Baud rate Printer selection Assignment of the

key

CFG2: Date Time Analog output Horn Evaluation mode

H Note: Double assignment of the functions DIALOG/UNIT and DATE/TIME. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

DIALOG (Selecting the language) In this function you can select the language for displaying the function names on the screen and for the test report. The following languages are available: • German • English (default setting) • French • Italian Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-53

Operation


5.15 General configuration More functions for the basic configuration of the USM 35X may be found in the function groups CFG1 and CFG2. – If required, go to the third operating level. – Select the function group CFG1 or CFG2.

Functions of CFG1 Dialog language Unit Baud rate Printer selection Assignment of the

key

CFG2: Date Time Analog output Horn Evaluation mode

H Note: Double assignment of the functions DIALOG/UNIT and DATE/TIME. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

DIALOG (Selecting the language) In this function you can select the language for displaying the function names on the screen and for the test report. The following languages are available: • German • English (default setting) • French • Italian Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-53

Operation


UNIT (Selecting units of measurement)

• Spanish • Portuguese • Dutch • Swedish • Slovenian • Romanian • Finnish • Czech • Danish • Hungarian • Croatian • Russian • Slovakian • Norwegian • Polish • Japanese

You can choose the required units between mm or inch in the function UNIT.

A Attention: You should always make your decision on the units immediately when starting to work with the USM 35X. If you change the unit, all current settings are deleted, and the basic setup is loaded. – Select the function UNIT. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required unit. To avoid any accidental deleting of values, the measurement line will display a safety prompt: Change unit?

H Note:

– If you are sure that you want to change the unit of measurement, press the corresponding key of the function UNIT. Any other key would abort the process.

More dialog languages can be added on request. – Select the function DIALOG. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required language. 5-54

The unit of measurement is now changed; the current data are deleted.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


UNIT (Selecting units of measurement)

• Spanish • Portuguese • Dutch • Swedish • Slovenian • Romanian • Finnish • Czech • Danish • Hungarian • Croatian • Russian • Slovakian • Norwegian • Polish • Japanese

You can choose the required units between mm or inch in the function UNIT.

A Attention: You should always make your decision on the units immediately when starting to work with the USM 35X. If you change the unit, all current settings are deleted, and the basic setup is loaded. – Select the function UNIT. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required unit. To avoid any accidental deleting of values, the measurement line will display a safety prompt: Change unit?

H Note:

– If you are sure that you want to change the unit of measurement, press the corresponding key of the function UNIT. Any other key would abort the process.

More dialog languages can be added on request. – Select the function DIALOG. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required language. 5-54

Krautkramer USM 35X

The unit of measurement is now changed; the current data are deleted.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission)

H Note:

In this function you can select the baud rate for the serial port transmission. You have a choice between 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, and 57600 Baud.

For more details on the how to print out a test report, please refer to chapter 6 Documentation.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required printer.

– Select the function BAUD-R. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required baud rate.

COPYMOD (Assignment of the

key)

When the key is pressed, data are output to the RS232 interface and transferred to a printer or a PC.

PRINTER (Printer for test report) In this function you can select the connected printer for printing out your test report. You have a choice between the following printer types: • Epson

You can use the function COPYMOD to choose the data to be transferred when the key is pressed. You have the following setting options: • hardcpy Hardcopy of the screen contents • report Test report with A-scan, all relevant settings for the inspection and space for hand-written remarks • meas P5 The magnified value given at the right upper corner of the A-scan

• HP LaserJet • HP DeskJet • Seiko DPU • HP LaserJet 1200 series • HP DeskJet 1200 series Krautkramer USM 35X

– Select the function PRINTER.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-55

Operation


BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission)

H Note:

In this function you can select the baud rate for the serial port transmission. You have a choice between 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, and 57600 Baud.

For more details on the how to print out a test report, please refer to chapter 6 Documentation.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required printer.

– Select the function BAUD-R. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required baud rate.

In this function you can select the connected printer for printing out your test report. You have a choice between the following printer types:

• HP LaserJet • HP DeskJet • Seiko DPU • HP LaserJet 1200 series • HP DeskJet 1200 series Krautkramer USM 35X

COPYMOD (Assignment of the

key)

When the key is pressed, data are output to the RS232 interface and transferred to a printer or a PC.

PRINTER (Printer for test report)

• Epson

– Select the function PRINTER.

You can use the function COPYMOD to choose the data to be transferred when the key is pressed. You have the following setting options: • hardcpy Hardcopy of the screen contents • report Test report with A-scan, all relevant settings for the inspection and space for hand-written remarks • meas P5 The magnified value given at the right upper corner of the A-scan

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-55

Operation


• meas P1 The measured value given at position 1 in the measurement line • pardump All instrument functions with the current settings • PCX Screen contents as a PCX-format file. To transfer the data to the PC, you will need a terminal program. • store The current instrument setting is stored to the selected (free) data set, and the data set number (DAT-#) is automatically increased. • datalog (only with Data Logger option) The selected job is printed out as a report including all measured values. • off The key is deactivated. • special as setting “hardcpy”. After printout of the screen contents no form feed, every press on the key prints out the next hardcopy on the same page (three or four hardcopies depending on the printer).

5-56

H Note: Please also refer to chapter 6 Documentation. – Select the function COPYMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required assignment for the key.

TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date) You have to check the current date and time and, if required, set them so that these data are correctly saved together with the test results.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


• meas P1 The measured value given at position 1 in the measurement line • pardump All instrument functions with the current settings • PCX Screen contents as a PCX-format file. To transfer the data to the PC, you will need a terminal program. • store The current instrument setting is stored to the selected (free) data set, and the data set number (DAT-#) is automatically increased. • datalog (only with Data Logger option) The selected job is printed out as a report including all measured values. • off The key is deactivated. • special as setting “hardcpy”. After printout of the screen contents no form feed, every press on the key prints out the next hardcopy on the same page (three or four hardcopies depending on the printer).

5-56

Krautkramer USM 35X

H Note: Please also refer to chapter 6 Documentation. – Select the function COPYMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required assignment for the key.

TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date) You have to check the current date and time and, if required, set them so that these data are correctly saved together with the test results.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


H Note:

ANAMOD

Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

You can output results of measurements at the analog output for external further processing. Use the function ANAMOD to configure the analog output in case there is no echo in the evaluation gate and the analog voltage has been selected for the sound path at the output.

A Attention: Always make sure that you are using correctly set time and date values. Otherwise test results might be corrupted. Be aware that the USM 35X displays the year as a two digit number!

You have the following setting options:

– Select the function TIME.

• hi volt The analog output supplies 5 volts.

– Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value that you want to change, e.g. the hour.

– Select the function ANAMOD.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the highlighted value.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required value.

• lo volt The analog output supplies 0 volt.

– Select the function DATE. – Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value that you want to change, e.g. the day. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the highlighted value. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-57

Operation


H Note:

ANAMOD

Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

You can output results of measurements at the analog output for external further processing. Use the function ANAMOD to configure the analog output in case there is no echo in the evaluation gate and the analog voltage has been selected for the sound path at the output.

A Attention: Always make sure that you are using correctly set time and date values. Otherwise test results might be corrupted. Be aware that the USM 35X displays the year as a two digit number!

You have the following setting options:

– Select the function TIME.

• hi volt The analog output supplies 5 volts.

– Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value that you want to change, e.g. the hour.

– Select the function ANAMOD.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the highlighted value.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required value.

• lo volt The analog output supplies 0 volt.

– Select the function DATE. – Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value that you want to change, e.g. the day. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the highlighted value. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-57

Operation


HORN

EVAMOD (Echo evaluation)

In this function, you can decide whether or not an acoustic alarm should be given in addition to the visual alarm (LED A).

This is where you can choose a method for the evaluation of the measured reflector echo. Depending on the instrument version used, you have various methods to choose from.

– Select the function HORN. – Use the left-hand rotary knob to set the horn to on or off.

• REF (default setting) Evaluation using the measurement of dB difference, available for all instrument versions

H Note:

• AWS Rating of welds according to AWS

Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored.

• DAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S) Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve • JISDAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S) Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 • DGS (only USM 35X S) Evaluation using the DGS method – Select the function EVAMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required method.

5-58

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


HORN

EVAMOD (Echo evaluation)

In this function, you can decide whether or not an acoustic alarm should be given in addition to the visual alarm (LED A).

This is where you can choose a method for the evaluation of the measured reflector echo. Depending on the instrument version used, you have various methods to choose from.

– Select the function HORN. – Use the left-hand rotary knob to set the horn to on or off.

• REF (default setting) Evaluation using the measurement of dB difference, available for all instrument versions

H Note:

• AWS Rating of welds according to AWS

Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored.

• DAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S) Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve • JISDAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S) Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 • DGS (only USM 35X S) Evaluation using the DGS method – Select the function EVAMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required method.

5-58

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Other functions with special keys

5.16 Other functions with special keys

Zooming the echo display If you press the key , the echo display is zoomed (zoom function) and is superimposed on the function group.

H Note: You will find a description of the key (setting of the dB incrementation for gain) on page 5-5; the key, which you will need for printing out your test report, is described in chapter 6 Documentation.

The functions are not accessible in this mode, except for the gain. It can still be set by means of the left-hand rotary knob. H Note: You cannot switch on the zoom function with gate widths smaller than 0.5 mm/0.02" (5920 m/s).

Freeze The key enables you to store (freeze) the displayed image on the screen. Gate parameters may still be changed in order to evaluate any signal being displayed in the frozen screen. The measurement resolution is only 0.5 % of the displayed range.

– Press the button mode.

in order to change to the zoom

– Press the button one more time in order to return to the normal mode.

– Press display.

if you want to store (“freeze”) a current

The key

– Press

again in order to return to normal mode.

You can use this key to save measured values and Ascans. In addition, it serves for recording echoes, for example as a reference echo. – Press the key in order to save a measured value or to record an echo.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-59

Operation

Other functions with special keys

5.16 Other functions with special keys

Zooming the echo display If you press the key , the echo display is zoomed (zoom function) and is superimposed on the function group.

H Note: You will find a description of the key (setting of the dB incrementation for gain) on page 5-5; the key, which you will need for printing out your test report, is described in chapter 6 Documentation.

The functions are not accessible in this mode, except for the gain. It can still be set by means of the left-hand rotary knob. H Note: You cannot switch on the zoom function with gate widths smaller than 0.5 mm/0.02" (5920 m/s).

Freeze The key enables you to store (freeze) the displayed image on the screen. Gate parameters may still be changed in order to evaluate any signal being displayed in the frozen screen. The measurement resolution is only 0.5 % of the displayed range.

– Press the button mode.

in order to change to the zoom

– Press the button one more time in order to return to the normal mode.

– Press display.

if you want to store (“freeze”) a current

The key

– Press

again in order to return to normal mode.

You can use this key to save measured values and Ascans. In addition, it serves for recording echoes, for example as a reference echo. – Press the key in order to save a measured value or to record an echo.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-59

Operation

Staus symbols and LEDs

5.17 Status symbols and LEDs

H Note:

Status symbols can be displayed in the line below the screen display to inform about certain settings and conditions of the USM 35X. The LEDs above the display give you further information.

If you are using the Data Logger option, you’ll find more status symbols, see chapter Option Data Logger.

LEDs Symbol

Description

Status symbols

A

Gate alarm.

Symbol

Description

R

Function REJECT is active.

*


D

Function DUAL (pulser-receiver separation) is active.

!

Data transfer active, (printing or remote control).

H Note:

B


F

Function TOF is set to flank.

P

Function TOF is set to peak.

J

Function TOF is set to jflank.

T

Function T-CORR is active.

R

Reference echo has been recorded (DGS).

A

Function ATT-OBJ/ATT-REF (sound attenuation) is active.

5-60

Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrumet is used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Staus symbols and LEDs

5.17 Status symbols and LEDs

H Note:

Status symbols can be displayed in the line below the screen display to inform about certain settings and conditions of the USM 35X. The LEDs above the display give you further information.

If you are using the Data Logger option, you’ll find more status symbols, see chapter Option Data Logger.

LEDs Symbol

Description

Status symbols

A

Gate alarm.

Symbol

Description

R

Function REJECT is active.

*


D

Function DUAL (pulser-receiver separation) is active.

!

Data transfer active, (printing or remote control).

H Note:

B


F

Function TOF is set to flank.

P

Function TOF is set to peak.

J

Function TOF is set to jflank.

T

Function T-CORR is active.

R

Reference echo has been recorded (DGS).

A

Function ATT-OBJ/ATT-REF (sound attenuation) is active.

5-60

Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrumet is used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation

Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

5.18 Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude curve in the function group DAC. If required, select the setting DAC in the function group EVAMOD first. – If required, go to the third operating level.

H Note:

– Select the function group CFG2.

The DAC function is available as a fixed function in the second operating level on the USM 35X DAC. With the USM 35X S, the DAC function can be additionally switched over to DGS evaluation mode.

– Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting DAC.

Due to the angle of the sound beam spread and to the sound attenuation in the material the echo height of reflectors of equal size depends on the distance to the probe.

– Select the function group DAC.

– Go to the second operating level.

A distance-amplitude curve, which is recorded with defined reference reflectors, graphically displays these influences. If you use a reference block having artificial flaws when recording a DAC you will be able to apply these echo amplitudes for the evaluation of discontinuities without any further correction. The reference block should be made of the same material as the test object. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


5.18 Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

5-61

You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude curve in the function group DAC. If required, select the setting DAC in the function group EVAMOD first. – If required, go to the third operating level.

H Note:

– Select the function group CFG2.

The DAC function is available as a fixed function in the second operating level on the USM 35X DAC. With the USM 35X S, the DAC function can be additionally switched over to DGS evaluation mode.

– Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting DAC.

Due to the angle of the sound beam spread and to the sound attenuation in the material the echo height of reflectors of equal size depends on the distance to the probe.

– Select the function group DAC.

– Go to the second operating level.

A distance-amplitude curve, which is recorded with defined reference reflectors, graphically displays these influences. If you use a reference block having artificial flaws when recording a DAC you will be able to apply these echo amplitudes for the evaluation of discontinuities without any further correction. The reference block should be made of the same material as the test object. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-61

Operation


H Note:

H Note:

Double assignment of the function T-CORR/OFFSET. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

No reference echoes can be recorded with DACMODE = TCG. TCG can only be activated if the reference echoes recorded are situated within a dynamic range of 40 dB. Otherwise an error message is output. If the TCG setting should be nevertheless be used in this case, then the DAC must be reduced (by deleting the last reference points) until TCG can be switched on.

DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) You can use this function to activate the DAC. The following settings are available:

– Select the function DACMOD.

• off No DAC is active. • DAC The already saved distance-amplitude curve is displayed on the screen, or a new DAC is recorded.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the DAC setting. If there is a DAC stored, it will now be active. – Select the TCG setting.

• TCG An existing DAC (at least 2 reference points) is displayed as a horizontal TCG line.

The TCG function is activated so that the DAC becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This means: all reference echoes recorded are brought (lifted or lowered) to the same echo height. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting off in order to deactivate the DAC again.

5-62

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


H Note:

H Note:

Double assignment of the function T-CORR/OFFSET. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

No reference echoes can be recorded with DACMODE = TCG. TCG can only be activated if the reference echoes recorded are situated within a dynamic range of 40 dB. Otherwise an error message is output. If the TCG setting should be nevertheless be used in this case, then the DAC must be reduced (by deleting the last reference points) until TCG can be switched on.

DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) You can use this function to activate the DAC. The following settings are available:

– Select the function DACMOD.

• off No DAC is active. • DAC The already saved distance-amplitude curve is displayed on the screen, or a new DAC is recorded. • TCG An existing DAC (at least 2 reference points) is displayed as a horizontal TCG line.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the DAC setting. If there is a DAC stored, it will now be active. – Select the TCG setting. The TCG function is activated so that the DAC becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This means: all reference echoes recorded are brought (lifted or lowered) to the same echo height. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting off in order to deactivate the DAC again.

5-62

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


DACECHO (Recording reference curve)

Before starting to record a reference curve, the instrument must be correctly calibrated (ref. section 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X).

to record the first reference echo. The – Press instrument gain will automatically change until the DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height (+/–0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to indicate that the first reference echo has been successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status symbol “R” appears (= reference echo stored).

The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly already existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free data set before starting to record a new curve!

– Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the recording process for other curve points. The number in the function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each recording.

A Attention:

– Select the function DACMOD. H Note: – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there is no previously recorded echo. – Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and 100 % screen height. – Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo sequence within the gate range. Krautkramer USM 35X

If the message “Echo is not valid” appears, the reference point could not be recorded. Check the gate position as well as the height of the reference echo and repeat the recording. As soon as you have recorded at least two curve reference points. Your DAC is already active (please see previous section). You can record a maximum of 10 curve reference points.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation



5-63

Before starting to record a reference curve, the instrument must be correctly calibrated (ref. section 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X).

to record the first reference echo. The – Press instrument gain will automatically change until the DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height (+/–0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to indicate that the first reference echo has been successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status symbol “R” appears (= reference echo stored).

The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly already existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free data set before starting to record a new curve!

– Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the recording process for other curve points. The number in the function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each recording.

A Attention:

– Select the function DACMOD. H Note: – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there is no previously recorded echo. – Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and 100 % screen height. – Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo sequence within the gate range. Krautkramer USM 35X

If the message “Echo is not valid” appears, the reference point could not be recorded. Check the gate position as well as the height of the reference echo and repeat the recording. As soon as you have recorded at least two curve reference points. Your DAC is already active (please see previous section). You can record a maximum of 10 curve reference points.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-63

Operation

Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)

Deleting reference points or the complete DAC

T-CORR (Sensitivity correction)

You can delete the reference point which was recorded last in each case, or the complete DAC.

This function enables you to compensate for the transfer losses in the material under test. This correction is necessary if test object and reference block have different surface qualities.

– Select the function DACECHO. – Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counterclockwise). The message “Do you want to delete the DAC echo?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting. In this way, you can record one or several new reference points.

You have to find out the adjustment value for the compensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line remains the same. – Select the function T-CORR. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

– In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the righthand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message “Do you want to delete all DAC echoes?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting.

5-64

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)

Deleting reference points or the complete DAC

T-CORR (Sensitivity correction)

You can delete the reference point which was recorded last in each case, or the complete DAC.

This function enables you to compensate for the transfer losses in the material under test. This correction is necessary if test object and reference block have different surface qualities.

– Select the function DACECHO. – Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counterclockwise). The message “Do you want to delete the DAC echo?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting. In this way, you can record one or several new reference points.

You have to find out the adjustment value for the compensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line remains the same. – Select the function T-CORR. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

– In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the righthand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message “Do you want to delete all DAC echoes?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting.

5-64

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC)

Echo evaluation with DAC

You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time determine the distance from the registration curve. The default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at –12 dB, –6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration curve. The setting 0 generates only the registration curve. Any setting different from 0 generates four other curves at a set distance from the original curve. For a better distinction in multiple DACs the registration curve is displayed as a bold line.

In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:

Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB – Select the function OFFSET. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X

• The distance-amplitude curve must already be recorded. • It only applies to the same probe that was used when recording the curve. Not even another probe of the same type must be used! • The DAC only apply to the material corresponding to the material of the reference block. • All functions affecting the echo amplitude must be set the same way as they were when the curve was recorded. This applies in particular to the following functions: POWER, FREQU, RECTIFY, MTLVEL and REJECT.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-65

Operation


OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC)

Echo evaluation with DAC

You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time determine the distance from the registration curve. The default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at –12 dB, –6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration curve. The setting 0 generates only the registration curve. Any setting different from 0 generates four other curves at a set distance from the original curve. For a better distinction in multiple DACs the registration curve is displayed as a bold line.

In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:

Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB – Select the function OFFSET. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X


Issue 01, 04/2005

5-65

Operation

DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

5.19 Distance-amplitude curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

– Select the function group JDAC.

H Note: The JISDAC function for echo evaluation with the dictance-amplitude curve and additional classification according to JIS Z3060-2002 is available in the USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S. You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 in the function group JDAC. If required, select the setting JDAC in the function group EVAMOD first. – If required, go to the third operating level.

H Note: Double assignment of the functions DACMOD/BOLDLI and T-CORR/OFFSET. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

– Select the function group CFG2. – Switch the function EVAMOD over to the setting JDAC. – Go to the second operating level. 5-66

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


5.19 Distance-amplitude curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

– Select the function group JDAC.

H Note: The JISDAC function for echo evaluation with the dictance-amplitude curve and additional classification according to JIS Z3060-2002 is available in the USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S. You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 in the function group JDAC. If required, select the setting JDAC in the function group EVAMOD first. – If required, go to the third operating level.

H Note: Double assignment of the functions DACMOD/BOLDLI and T-CORR/OFFSET. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

– Select the function group CFG2. – Switch the function EVAMOD over to the setting JDAC. – Go to the second operating level. 5-66

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


DACMOD (Activating DAC according to JIS) You can use this function to activate the DAC. The following settings are available: • off No DAC is active.


• DAC DAC according to JIS with 6 curves. The first 4 curves are identified with the letters L, M, H and U dedicated to these curves, and therefore move with any gain change.

The TCG function is activated so that the DAC becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This means: all reference echoes recorded are brought (lifted or lowered) to the same echo height.

In JISDAC also the echo evaluation in classes can be performed. The flaw class depends on the position of the echo peak within the first 4 curves: class I: class II: class III: tion level) class IV:

amplitude < curve L curve L < amplitude < curve M curve M < amplitude < curve H (registraamplitude > curve H

– Select the function DACMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting off in order to deactivate the DAC again. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


DACMOD (Activating DAC according to JIS) You can use this function to activate the DAC. The following settings are available: • off No DAC is active.

5-67


• DAC DAC according to JIS with 6 curves. The first 4 curves are identified with the letters L, M, H and U dedicated to these curves, and therefore move with any gain change.

The TCG function is activated so that the DAC becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This means: all reference echoes recorded are brought (lifted or lowered) to the same echo height.

In JISDAC also the echo evaluation in classes can be performed. The flaw class depends on the position of the echo peak within the first 4 curves: class I: class II: class III: tion level) class IV:

amplitude < curve L curve L < amplitude < curve M curve M < amplitude < curve H (registraamplitude > curve H

– Select the function DACMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting off in order to deactivate the DAC again. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-67

Operation



A Attention: Before starting to record a reference curve, the instrument must be correctly calibrated (ref. section 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X). The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly already existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free data set before starting to record a new curve! – Select the function DACMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there is no previously recorded echo.

– Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and 100 % screen height. – Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo sequence within the gate range. – Press to record the first reference echo. The instrument gain will automatically change until the DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height (+/– 0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to indicate that the first reference echo has been successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status symbol “R” appears (= reference echo stored). H Note: The dB-value by which the gain has been changed related to the reference gain can be displayed using the new parameter DAC dB.

5-68

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X



A Attention: Before starting to record a reference curve, the instrument must be correctly calibrated (ref. section 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X). The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly already existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free data set before starting to record a new curve! – Select the function DACMOD. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there is no previously recorded echo.

– Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and 100 % screen height. – Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo sequence within the gate range. – Press to record the first reference echo. The instrument gain will automatically change until the DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height (+/– 0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to indicate that the first reference echo has been successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status symbol “R” appears (= reference echo stored). H Note: The dB-value by which the gain has been changed related to the reference gain can be displayed using the new parameter DAC dB.

5-68

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


The function DACECHO displays the number 1.

Deleting reference points or the complete DAC You can delete the reference point which was recorded last in each case, or the complete DAC. – Select the function DACECHO. – Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counterclockwise). The message “Do you want to delete the DAC echo?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting.

– Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the recording process for other curve points. The number in the function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each recording. H Note: If the message “Echo is not valid” appears, the reference point could not be recorded. Check the gate position as well as the height of the reference echo and repeat the recording. Krautkramer USM 35X

– In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the righthand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message “Do you want to delete all DAC echoes?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting. In this way, you can record one or several new reference points.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


The function DACECHO displays the number 1.

5-69

Deleting reference points or the complete DAC You can delete the reference point which was recorded last in each case, or the complete DAC. – Select the function DACECHO. – Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counterclockwise). The message “Do you want to delete the DAC echo?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting.

– Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the recording process for other curve points. The number in the function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each recording. H Note: If the message “Echo is not valid” appears, the reference point could not be recorded. Check the gate position as well as the height of the reference echo and repeat the recording. Krautkramer USM 35X

– In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the righthand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message “Do you want to delete all DAC echoes?” appears in the measurement line. – Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or press another key in order to cancel the process of deleting. In this way, you can record one or several new reference points.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-69

Operation


BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve)

– Select the function T-CORR.

One of the four curves marked with a character (L, M, H, U) can be selected as the registration curve. This registration curve will then be displayed as a bold line and an echo amplitude evaluation (dB-to-curve) will be made for this curve.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

– Select the function BOLDLI. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) This function enables you to compensate for the transfer losses in the material under test. This correction is necessary if test object and reference block have different surface qualities. You have to find out the adjustment value for the compensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line remains the same.

5-70

OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time determine the distance from the registration curve. The default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at –12 dB, –6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration curve, and additionally two other curves at +18 dB and +24 dB. The setting 0 generates only the registration curve and the two fixed curves. Any setting different from 0 generates four other curves at a set distance from the original curve. For a better distinction in multiple DACs the registration curve is displayed as a bold line. Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB – Select the function OFFSET. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve)

– Select the function T-CORR.

One of the four curves marked with a character (L, M, H, U) can be selected as the registration curve. This registration curve will then be displayed as a bold line and an echo amplitude evaluation (dB-to-curve) will be made for this curve.

– Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

– Select the function BOLDLI. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) This function enables you to compensate for the transfer losses in the material under test. This correction is necessary if test object and reference block have different surface qualities. You have to find out the adjustment value for the compensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line remains the same.

5-70

OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time determine the distance from the registration curve. The default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at –12 dB, –6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration curve, and additionally two other curves at +18 dB and +24 dB. The setting 0 generates only the registration curve and the two fixed curves. Any setting different from 0 generates four other curves at a set distance from the original curve. For a better distinction in multiple DACs the registration curve is displayed as a bold line. Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB – Select the function OFFSET. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required setting.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Echo evaluation with DAC In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:

5.20 Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) With the USM 35X S, you can use both the DAC and the DGS method of amplitude evaluation.


Measuring with DGS Using the DGS function (Distance Gain Size), you can compare the reflecting power of a natural flaw in the test object with that of a theoretical flaw (circular diskshaped equivalent reflector) at the same depth.

A Attention: You are comparing the reflecting power of a natural flaw with that of a theoretical flaw. No definite conclusions may be drawn on the natural flaw (roughness, inclined position, etc.). The so-called DGS diagram forms the basis for this comparison of the reflecting power. This diagram consists of a set of curves showing the correlation of three influencing variables:

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


Echo evaluation with DAC In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:

5-71

5.20 Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) With the USM 35X S, you can use both the DAC and the DGS method of amplitude evaluation.


Measuring with DGS Using the DGS function (Distance Gain Size), you can compare the reflecting power of a natural flaw in the test object with that of a theoretical flaw (circular diskshaped equivalent reflector) at the same depth.

A Attention: You are comparing the reflecting power of a natural flaw with that of a theoretical flaw. No definite conclusions may be drawn on the natural flaw (roughness, inclined position, etc.). The so-called DGS diagram forms the basis for this comparison of the reflecting power. This diagram consists of a set of curves showing the correlation of three influencing variables:

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-71

Operation

Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

• Distance D between the probe and circular diskshaped equivalent reflector • Difference in gain G between various large circular disk-shaped equivalent reflectors and an infinitely large backwall • Size S of the circular disk-shaped equivalent reflector. The influencing variable S always remains constant for one curve of the set of curves The advantage of the DGS method lies in the fact that you can carry out reproducible evaluations of small discontinuities. The reproducibility is most of all important, for example, whenever you aim to carry out an acceptance test. Apart from the influencing variables already mentioned, there are other factors determining the curve shape: • sound attenuation

The following probe parameters affect the curve shape: • element or crystal diameter • frequency • delay length • delay velocity You can adjust these parameters on the USM 35X S in such a way that you can use the DGS method with many different probes and on different materials. H Note: Before setting the DGS function, the instrument must first be calibrated because all functions affecting the DGS evaluation mode (MTLVEL, P-DELAY, DAMPING, POWER, FINE G, FREQU, RECTIFY) can no longer be changed after the reference echo has been recorded. Please also refer to chapter 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X on this subject.

• transfer losses • amplitude correction value • probe. 5-72

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation


• Distance D between the probe and circular diskshaped equivalent reflector • Difference in gain G between various large circular disk-shaped equivalent reflectors and an infinitely large backwall • Size S of the circular disk-shaped equivalent reflector. The influencing variable S always remains constant for one curve of the set of curves The advantage of the DGS method lies in the fact that you can carry out reproducible evaluations of small discontinuities. The reproducibility is most of all important, for example, whenever you aim to carry out an acceptance test. Apart from the influencing variables already mentioned, there are other factors determining the curve shape: • sound attenuation • transfer losses

Krautkramer USM 35X

The following probe parameters affect the curve shape: • element or crystal diameter • frequency • delay length • delay velocity You can adjust these parameters on the USM 35X S in such a way that you can use the DGS method with many different probes and on different materials. H Note: Before setting the DGS function, the instrument must first be calibrated because all functions affecting the DGS evaluation mode (MTLVEL, P-DELAY, DAMPING, POWER, FINE G, FREQU, RECTIFY) can no longer be changed after the reference echo has been recorded. Please also refer to chapter 5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X on this subject.

• amplitude correction value • probe. 5-72

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Selecting the DGS mode

Double assignment of functions:


The following functions are double assigned. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

– Select the function group CFG2. – Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting DGS. – Go to the second operating level.

DGSMEN> Calling the DGS menu

DGSMEN> Switching on/off the DGS evaluation mode

T-CORR> Setting the transfer correction

OFFSET> Activating the multi-curve display mode

– Select the function group DGS.

Default settings for the DGS measurement In the next step, the DGS menu is called enabling to select the corresponding probe and to set the other DGS parameters: – Select the function DGSMEN. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to call the DGS menu.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-73

Operation


Selecting the DGS mode

Double assignment of functions:


The following functions are double assigned. Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .

– Select the function group CFG2. – Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting DGS. – Go to the second operating level.

DGSMEN> Calling the DGS menu

DGSMEN> Switching on/off the DGS evaluation mode

T-CORR> Setting the transfer correction

OFFSET> Activating the multi-curve display mode

– Select the function group DGS.

Default settings for the DGS measurement In the next step, the DGS menu is called enabling to select the corresponding probe and to set the other DGS parameters: – Select the function DGSMEN. – Use the right-hand rotary knob to call the DGS menu.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-73

Operation


– Define your settings: • PROBE-#: probe number Fixed-programmed probes with all settings (PRBNAME, DEL-VEL, D eff and PRBFREQ cannot be changed in the case of these probes); PROBE-# = 0 is user-programmable with reference to all parameters. • PRBNAME: probe name The name belongs to the selected probe number and cannot be changed; the individual probe name can be entered only with PROBE-# = 0. • DGS-CRV: registration curve for DGS evaluation This enables you to select the circular disk-shaped equivalent reflector diameter to be used for displaying the DGS curve and used as recording threshold for echo evaluations.

• PRBFREQ: probe frequency Frequency of the transducer; predefined with programmed probes. • REFECHO: type of the reference reflector used BW backwall SDH side drilled hole FBH flat bottom hole • REFSIZE: size of the reference reflector • ATT-REF: sound attenuation in the reference block • ATT-OBJ: sound attenuation in the test object • AMPLCOR: value for the amplitude correction. This is required whenever you are using an angle probe and the quadrant echo from the calibration standards K1 or K2 as a reference reflector. – To return to the A-scan, press one of the following keys: , or .

• DEL-VEL: delay material velocity of the probe Predefined with programmed probes. • D eff: effective element diameter of the probe used Predefined with programmed probes.

5-74

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


– Define your settings: • PROBE-#: probe number Fixed-programmed probes with all settings (PRBNAME, DEL-VEL, D eff and PRBFREQ cannot be changed in the case of these probes); PROBE-# = 0 is user-programmable with reference to all parameters. • PRBNAME: probe name The name belongs to the selected probe number and cannot be changed; the individual probe name can be entered only with PROBE-# = 0. • DGS-CRV: registration curve for DGS evaluation This enables you to select the circular disk-shaped equivalent reflector diameter to be used for displaying the DGS curve and used as recording threshold for echo evaluations.

• PRBFREQ: probe frequency Frequency of the transducer; predefined with programmed probes. • REFECHO: type of the reference reflector used BW backwall SDH side drilled hole FBH flat bottom hole • REFSIZE: size of the reference reflector • ATT-REF: sound attenuation in the reference block • ATT-OBJ: sound attenuation in the test object • AMPLCOR: value for the amplitude correction. This is required whenever you are using an angle probe and the quadrant echo from the calibration standards K1 or K2 as a reference reflector. – To return to the A-scan, press one of the following keys: , or .

• DEL-VEL: delay material velocity of the probe Predefined with programmed probes. • D eff: effective element diameter of the probe used Predefined with programmed probes.

5-74

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Recording the reference echo and displaying the DGS curve

Example

To be able to display the required DGS curve, you have to first record the reference echo. – You have to start by optimizing the echo of the reference reflector, in this case the backwall echo from the test object. – Continue by positioning the gate on the reference echo.

In this example, the probe MB 4 S is selected. Reference reflector = backwall, the 3 mm circular disc is to be displayed as curve. The sound attenuation corrections ATT-REF and ATT-OBJ and the amplitude correction AMPLCOR (for angle probes and calibration standard K1/K2) remain at 0.

– Select the function DGS-REF, and use the right-hand rotary knob to switch the function on. The message: “Do you want to change the DGS reference echo?” appears. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-75

Operation


Recording the reference echo and displaying the DGS curve

Example

To be able to display the required DGS curve, you have to first record the reference echo. – You have to start by optimizing the echo of the reference reflector, in this case the backwall echo from the test object. – Continue by positioning the gate on the reference echo.

In this example, the probe MB 4 S is selected. Reference reflector = backwall, the 3 mm circular disc is to be displayed as curve. The sound attenuation corrections ATT-REF and ATT-OBJ and the amplitude correction AMPLCOR (for angle probes and calibration standard K1/K2) remain at 0.

– Select the function DGS-REF, and use the right-hand rotary knob to switch the function on. The message: “Do you want to change the DGS reference echo?” appears. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-75

Operation – If required, confirm by pressing


Evaluation of reflectors

again.

After the successful recording of the reference echo, a highlighted R will be displayed in the measurement line.

Every echo situated within the gate can be immediately evaluated:

– Set the function DGSMOD> to on, to switch on DGS curve.

Taking the general DGS diagram as a basis, the instrument calculates the required test sensitivity for displaying the 3 mm curve with its maximum at 80 % screen height, and sets this value. The current gain is set to 0 during this. In the case of subsequent gain variations, the curve is automatically adapted.

5-76

The measurement line has been configured in such a way that the sound path S, the echo height in dB referred to the DGS curve, the equivalent reflector size (ERS) of the flaw echo and the calibration range are displayed. The measured value to be zoomed in the A-scan is chosen by means of the function S-DISP in the function group MEAS. ERS was chosen in the above example. (Also refer to Configuring the measurement line, p. 5-49.)

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation – If required, confirm by pressing

Krautkramer USM 35X


Evaluation of reflectors

again.

After the successful recording of the reference echo, a highlighted R will be displayed in the measurement line.

Every echo situated within the gate can be immediately evaluated:

– Set the function DGSMOD> to on, to switch on DGS curve.

Taking the general DGS diagram as a basis, the instrument calculates the required test sensitivity for displaying the 3 mm curve with its maximum at 80 % screen height, and sets this value. The current gain is set to 0 during this. In the case of subsequent gain variations, the curve is automatically adapted.

5-76

The measurement line has been configured in such a way that the sound path S, the echo height in dB referred to the DGS curve, the equivalent reflector size (ERS) of the flaw echo and the calibration range are displayed. The measured value to be zoomed in the A-scan is chosen by means of the function S-DISP in the function group MEAS. ERS was chosen in the above example. (Also refer to Configuring the measurement line, p. 5-49.)

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


S-DISP = Ha%Crv, the evaluation result is now the value exceeding the curve in %.

S-DISP = Ha%, i.e. echo height evaluation as a percentage. At the same time, the multiple-curve display mode is also active with a curve distance of OFFSET = 6 dB.

S-DISP = Gt is a special case: the value displayed is the DGS test sensitivity with which the maximum of the specified curve is at 80 %. This value serves for the purpose of checking and documenting.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-77

Operation


S-DISP = Ha%Crv, the evaluation result is now the value exceeding the curve in %.

S-DISP = Ha%, i.e. echo height evaluation as a percentage. At the same time, the multiple-curve display mode is also active with a curve distance of OFFSET = 6 dB.

S-DISP = Gt is a special case: the value displayed is the DGS test sensitivity with which the maximum of the specified curve is at 80 %. This value serves for the purpose of checking and documenting.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-77

Operation


Transfer correction

Sound attenuation

The transfer correction is activated by means of the function T-CORR. The test sensitivity is varied by this value without recalculating the curve.

If necessary, the DGS curve can take the component’s effective sound attenuation (ATT-OBJ) into account. With the value set here, the curve shape is recalculated so that the effect of sound attenuation is now taken into consideration when evaluating reflectors.

This means that the test sensitivity is increased by 6 dB in the example in order to compensate for a possibly existing surface roughness. The echo is consequently drawn higher by 6 dB on the left, i.e. evaluated with ERS 3.2. Status indicator in the measurement line: a highlighted T.

5-78

The DGS curve now includes the effect of sound attenuation. An active sound attenuation correction is indicated in the measurement line by a highlighted A. The sound attenuation in the reference block can only be set prior to recording the reference echo. Therefore, an error message is displayed here if an attempt is

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


Transfer correction

Sound attenuation

The transfer correction is activated by means of the function T-CORR. The test sensitivity is varied by this value without recalculating the curve.

If necessary, the DGS curve can take the component’s effective sound attenuation (ATT-OBJ) into account. With the value set here, the curve shape is recalculated so that the effect of sound attenuation is now taken into consideration when evaluating reflectors.

This means that the test sensitivity is increased by 6 dB in the example in order to compensate for a possibly existing surface roughness. The echo is consequently drawn higher by 6 dB on the left, i.e. evaluated with ERS 3.2. Status indicator in the measurement line: a highlighted T.

5-78

The DGS curve now includes the effect of sound attenuation. An active sound attenuation correction is indicated in the measurement line by a highlighted A. The sound attenuation in the reference block can only be set prior to recording the reference echo. Therefore, an error message is displayed here if an attempt is

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


made to change the value because, in fact, a valid reference echo already exists. In addition, a different reference reflector type has been used in the DGS menu below: instead of a backwall, a circular disk (flat-bottom hole) having a diameter of 3 mm has been set in this case. In this case, of course, the reference echo has to be received from a 3 mm circular disk.

A side-drilled hole can also be used as a further reference reflector with some limitations. It must have a diameter corresponding to at least 1.5 times the wavelength used, and the distance must be 1.5 times the near-field length. The USM 35X S will check these conditions if you aim to use a side-drilled hole as reference reflector, and will issue an error message if required.

After switching on the DGS curve, the reference echo must therefore clearly touch the 3 mm curve.

Krautkramer USM 35X

The table on the next page indicates these minimum data for the existing probes in steel. Conditions for the use of side-drilled holes as reference reflectors in steel. For other materials, the values must be converted accordingly.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-79

Operation


made to change the value because, in fact, a valid reference echo already exists. In addition, a different reference reflector type has been used in the DGS menu below: instead of a backwall, a circular disk (flat-bottom hole) having a diameter of 3 mm has been set in this case. In this case, of course, the reference echo has to be received from a 3 mm circular disk.

A side-drilled hole can also be used as a further reference reflector with some limitations. It must have a diameter corresponding to at least 1.5 times the wavelength used, and the distance must be 1.5 times the near-field length. The USM 35X S will check these conditions if you aim to use a side-drilled hole as reference reflector, and will issue an error message if required.

After switching on the DGS curve, the reference echo must therefore clearly touch the 3 mm curve.

Krautkramer USM 35X

The table on the next page indicates these minimum data for the existing probes in steel. Conditions for the use of side-drilled holes as reference reflectors in steel. For other materials, the values must be converted accordingly.

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-79

Operation


Probe

Wavelength in steel [mm]

Minimum Diameter side-drilled hole [mm]

Near Field Length in steel [mm]

Minimum Distance in steel [mm]

B1S

6.0

9.0

23

35

B2S

3.0

4.5

45

68

B4S

1.5

2.3

90

135

MB 2 S

3.0

4.5

8

12

MB 4 S

1.5

2.3

15

23

MB 5 S

1.2

1.8

20

30

MWB ...-2

1.6

2.4

15

23

MWB ...-4

0.8

1.2

30

45

SWB ...-2

1.6

2.4

39

59

SWB ...-5

0.7

1.1

98

147

WB ...-1

3.3

5.0

45

68

WB ...-2

1.6

2.4

90

135

5-80

Issue 01, 04/2005

Operation

Krautkramer USM 35X


Probe

Wavelength in steel [mm]

Minimum Diameter side-drilled hole [mm]

Near Field Length in steel [mm]

Minimum Distance in steel [mm]

B1S

6.0

9.0

23

35

B2S

3.0

4.5

45

68

B4S

1.5

2.3

90

135

MB 2 S

3.0

4.5

8

12

MB 4 S

1.5

2.3

15

23

MB 5 S

1.2

1.8

20

30

MWB ...-2

1.6

2.4

15

23

MWB ...-4

0.8

1.2

30

45

SWB ...-2

1.6

2.4

39

59

SWB ...-5

0.7

1.1

98

147

WB ...-1

3.3

5.0

45

68

WB ...-2

1.6

2.4

90

135

5-80

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation


Locks, error messages

Validity of the DGS method

As long as a valid reference echo is stored, no functions can be changed which could cause an incorrect DGS evaluation. If an attempt is made to change such a function, the corresponding error message will appear, e.g.

Echo amplitude evaluations according to the DGS method are only reliable and reproducible in cases when:

“P-DELAY locked by DGS-REF = on” The DGS evaluation must likewise be switched off and the reference echo deleted in the case of selecting a new probe, e.g. for a new test application.

• The reference echo is received from the test object if possible. If this is not possible, it should be ensured that the reference block is made of the same material as the test object. • The evaluation is carried out using the same probe which was also used for recording the reference echo. Another probe of the same type can be used after recording a new reference echo. • Echo amplitudes for reflector distances smaller than half of the probe’s near-field length are subject to heavy variation – for physical reasons due to interference phenomena effecting the area. Thus, evaluation results may fluctuate more as the usually permissible ±2 dB. An evaluation according to the DGS method is possible but not recommended for this cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-81

Operation


Locks, error messages

Validity of the DGS method

As long as a valid reference echo is stored, no functions can be changed which could cause an incorrect DGS evaluation. If an attempt is made to change such a function, the corresponding error message will appear, e.g.

Echo amplitude evaluations according to the DGS method are only reliable and reproducible in cases when:

“P-DELAY locked by DGS-REF = on” The DGS evaluation must likewise be switched off and the reference echo deleted in the case of selecting a new probe, e.g. for a new test application.

• The reference echo is received from the test object if possible. If this is not possible, it should be ensured that the reference block is made of the same material as the test object. • The evaluation is carried out using the same probe which was also used for recording the reference echo. Another probe of the same type can be used after recording a new reference echo. • Echo amplitudes for reflector distances smaller than half of the probe’s near-field length are subject to heavy variation – for physical reasons due to interference phenomena effecting the area. Thus, evaluation results may fluctuate more as the usually permissible ±2 dB. An evaluation according to the DGS method is possible but not recommended for this cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

5-81

5-82

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

5-82

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Documentation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

6-1

Documentation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

6

6

6-1

Documentation

Printing data

6.1 Printing data

Preparing the printer The transfer parameter settings for the serial port are:

Direct printing of the following data via the RS 232 interface is possible using the USM 35X:

• Baud rate

0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, and 57600

• Word length

8 data bits (fixed)

• Parity

none (fixed)

• Stop bits

2 (fixed)

• test report containing the A-scan and the adjustment data • A-scan • single reading (position 1 of the measurement line) • function list (including all current settings)

In order to ensure a perfect communication, set the printer to the parameters of the USM 35X.

• Data Logger (if the version is available) To do this, you need

Preparing the USM 35X

• a printer with serial interface RS 232

You decide on the type of printout by assigning the key.

• a printer cable (please see chapter 2)

– If necessary, go to the third operating level. – Select the function group CFG1. – Select the function PRINTER, and then use the righthand rotary knob to select the correct printer driver. 6-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Documentation

Printing data

6.1 Printing data

Preparing the printer The transfer parameter settings for the serial port are:

Direct printing of the following data via the RS 232 interface is possible using the USM 35X:

• Baud rate

0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, and 57600

• Word length

8 data bits (fixed)

• Parity

none (fixed)

• Stop bits

2 (fixed)

• test report containing the A-scan and the adjustment data • A-scan • single reading (position 1 of the measurement line) • function list (including all current settings) • Data Logger (if the version is available)

In order to ensure a perfect communication, set the printer to the parameters of the USM 35X.

To do this, you need • a printer with serial interface RS 232 • a printer cable (please see chapter 2)

Preparing the USM 35X You decide on the type of printout by assigning the key. – If necessary, go to the third operating level. – Select the function group CFG1. – Select the function PRINTER, and then use the righthand rotary knob to select the correct printer driver.

6-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Documentation

Printing data

– Use to select the function COPYMOD, and then use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting: hardcpy, report, meas P5 (enlarged value in A-scan), meas P1 (measured value at position 1), pardump (function list), datalog (Data Logger job including measured values), special (several A-scans on one page). H Note: The setting PCX generates a PCX-format file which you can transfer to a PC by means of a suitable program capable of receiving and storing data.

Printing If you have connected, prepared and activated the printer, just press the key. The report is printed out. If you have selected the setting special, press the key again for each A-scan that you want to print out.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

6-3

Documentation

Printing data

– Use to select the function COPYMOD, and then use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting: hardcpy, report, meas P5 (enlarged value in A-scan), meas P1 (measured value at position 1), pardump (function list), datalog (Data Logger job including measured values), special (several A-scans on one page). H Note: The setting PCX generates a PCX-format file which you can transfer to a PC by means of a suitable program capable of receiving and storing data.

Printing If you have connected, prepared and activated the printer, just press the key. The report is printed out. If you have selected the setting special, press the key again for each A-scan that you want to print out.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

6-3

Documentation

Documentation with UltraDOC

6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC The special application program UltraDOC from GE Inspection Technologies enables you to remote-control the USM 35X and to include instrument settings in ASCII format or screen contents in PCX or IMG format in your test report. All data can be further processed using commerical word processing or DTP programs. You will receive information about the reliable use of the program in a detailed operating manual.

6-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Documentation

Krautkramer USM 35X

Documentation with UltraDOC

6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC The special application program UltraDOC from GE Inspection Technologies enables you to remote-control the USM 35X and to include instrument settings in ASCII format or screen contents in PCX or IMG format in your test report. All data can be further processed using commerical word processing or DTP programs. You will receive information about the reliable use of the program in a detailed operating manual.

6-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

7

7-1

7

7-1


Care of the instrument

7.1 Care of the instrument Clean the instrument and its accessories using a moist cloth. Only use the following recommended instrument cleaners: • water, • a mild household cleaner or • alcohol (no methyl alcohol).

A

Attention:

Do not use any methyl alcohol, solvents, or dye penetrant cleaners! The plastic parts can be damaged or embrittled by this.

7-2

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Care of the instrument

7.1 Care of the instrument Clean the instrument and its accessories using a moist cloth. Only use the following recommended instrument cleaners: • water, • a mild household cleaner or • alcohol (no methyl alcohol).

A

Attention:

Do not use any methyl alcohol, solvents, or dye penetrant cleaners! The plastic parts can be damaged or embrittled by this.

7-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Care of the batteries

7.2 Care of the batteries

A Attention:


You should only use the batteries recommended by us and the corresponding battery charger. An improper handling of the batteries and of the battery charger may cause explosion hazard.

Capacity and life of batteries mainly depend on the correct handling. Please therefore observe the tips below. You should charge the batteries in the following cases: • before the initial startup

If batteries are only partially discharged (less than 50 % of operating time), the full capacity is not reached by normal charging. – Start by fully discharging the batteries. You can use the discharging function of the charger for this. For more details, please read the notes on the operation of the battery charger.

• after a storage time of 3 months or longer • after frequent partial discharge

Charging the batteries

– The batteries are automatically charged after that.

You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in the instrument or by means of the external battery charger DR36 (order number 35 297) recommended by us. You always need an external battery charger to charge standard C-cells. In this regard, please pay attention to the information on the operation of the battery charger. Krautkramer USM 35X

Charging of partially discharged NiCd batteries

Charging of exhausted NiCd batteries If batteries are exhausted, e.g. after a prolonged storage time in empty state, they often reach their full capacity only after repeated discharge/charge cycles.

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-3



7.2 Care of the batteries

A Attention:


You should only use the batteries recommended by us and the corresponding battery charger. An improper handling of the batteries and of the battery charger may cause explosion hazard.

Capacity and life of batteries mainly depend on the correct handling. Please therefore observe the tips below. You should charge the batteries in the following cases: • before the initial startup

If batteries are only partially discharged (less than 50 % of operating time), the full capacity is not reached by normal charging. – Start by fully discharging the batteries. You can use the discharging function of the charger for this. For more details, please read the notes on the operation of the battery charger.

• after a storage time of 3 months or longer • after frequent partial discharge

Charging the batteries

– The batteries are automatically charged after that.

You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in the instrument or by means of the external battery charger DR36 (order number 35 297) recommended by us. You always need an external battery charger to charge standard C-cells. In this regard, please pay attention to the information on the operation of the battery charger. Krautkramer USM 35X

Charging of partially discharged NiCd batteries

Charging of exhausted NiCd batteries If batteries are exhausted, e.g. after a prolonged storage time in empty state, they often reach their full capacity only after repeated discharge/charge cycles.

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-3



The charger identifies defective batteries. In that case, replace the batteries by a new set. Otherwise there is the danger that individual cells have different capacities so that you will no longer obtain the normal operating time with the instrument in battery operation.

How to handle alkaline batteries – Please remove the batteries from the instrument if it has not been operated for a longer time.

A Attention: Leaking batteries may cause severe damages to the instrument! You should always only use leak-proof batteries and remove them from the instrument after turning it off. H Note: Used batteries are special waste and have to be disposed of according to legal requirements! In the interest of environmental protection, we recommend that you only use rechargeable batteries.

7-4

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X


The charger identifies defective batteries. In that case, replace the batteries by a new set. Otherwise there is the danger that individual cells have different capacities so that you will no longer obtain the normal operating time with the instrument in battery operation.

How to handle alkaline batteries – Please remove the batteries from the instrument if it has not been operated for a longer time.

A Attention: Leaking batteries may cause severe damages to the instrument! You should always only use leak-proof batteries and remove them from the instrument after turning it off. H Note: Used batteries are special waste and have to be disposed of according to legal requirements! In the interest of environmental protection, we recommend that you only use rechargeable batteries.

7-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Maintenance

7.3 Maintenance The USM 35X requires basically no maintenance.

A Attention: Repair work may only be carried out by members of authorized Service staff of GE Inspection Technologies.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-5


Maintenance

7.3 Maintenance The USM 35X requires basically no maintenance.

A Attention: Repair work may only be carried out by members of authorized Service staff of GE Inspection Technologies.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-5


Recycling

7.4 Recycling General view of the device In the following you find an instrument overview as well as guidelines and notes for recycling and waste disposal of the components.

7-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling

7.4 Recycling General view of the device In the following you find an instrument overview as well as guidelines and notes for recycling and waste disposal of the components.

7-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling

No.

Recycling/material code

Description

1

Lithium-ion battery

2

LCD - display

3

>PC< / Brass

4 5 6 7 8 9

Stainless steel Aluminium >PC< Stainless steel >PC< Aluminium

Battery inside the battery compartment at the bottom of the instrument. In order to open the compartment the quick acting closures have to be actuated. Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 – 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg) Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread insert. Handle complete Rotary control button Holder for handle Ratchet disk Housing lower part Div. mounting brackets

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


Recycling

No.

7-7


Description

1

Lithium-ion battery

2

LCD - display

3

>PC< / Brass

4 5 6 7 8 9

Stainless steel Aluminium >PC< Stainless steel >PC< Aluminium

Battery inside the battery compartment at the bottom of the instrument. In order to open the compartment the quick acting closures have to be actuated. Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 – 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg) Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread insert. Handle complete Rotary control button Holder for handle Ratchet disk Housing lower part Div. mounting brackets

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-7


Recycling

Materials for separate disposal In the following you find guidelines and notes for removing materials/components, which must be removed and treated separately.

7-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling

Materials for separate disposal In the following you find guidelines and notes for removing materials/components, which must be removed and treated separately.

7-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling

No.


1

2 3

Lithium-ion battery

4

LCD - display

Krautkramer USM 35X

Description In order to remove the LCD-Display the upper housing has to be withdrawn first. After loosing 6 screws on the bottom side and one further in batterycompartment, the complete upper housing can be taken away. In order to open the compartment at the bottom of the equipment, the quick acting closures have to be actuated. Inside the battery compartment. Can easily be removed after opening the battery cover. Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 – 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg).

Issue 01, 04/2005


Recycling

No.

7-9


1

2 3

Lithium-ion battery

4

LCD - display

Krautkramer USM 35X

Description In order to remove the LCD-Display the upper housing has to be withdrawn first. After loosing 6 screws on the bottom side and one further in batterycompartment, the complete upper housing can be taken away. In order to open the compartment at the bottom of the equipment, the quick acting closures have to be actuated. Inside the battery compartment. Can easily be removed after opening the battery cover. Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 – 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg).

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-9


Recycling

Further materials and components In the following you find notes for dismantling materials/components, which can disturb several recycling processes, and materials/components for which benefits can normally be achieved.

7-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling

Further materials and components In the following you find notes for dismantling materials/components, which can disturb several recycling processes, and materials/components for which benefits can normally be achieved.

7-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling

No.


Description

1

>PC< / Brass

2 3 4 5

Circuit boards Aluminium Stainless steel >PC<

Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread insert. Circuit board in lower housing, under it battery-PCB Two rotary control buttons Handle, rubber tube can be removed Lower housing and battery-cover

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


Recycling

No.

7-11


Description

1

>PC< / Brass

2 3 4 5

Circuit boards Aluminium Stainless steel >PC<

Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread insert. Circuit board in lower housing, under it battery-PCB Two rotary control buttons Handle, rubber tube can be removed Lower housing and battery-cover

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-11


Recycling

Recycling data of master device Recycling/material code

Weight approx. (kg)

Description

Materials/components, which must be removed and treated separately: LCD - display 0.22 Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 – 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg) Lithium-ion battery 0.49 Located inside the battery compartment subtotal 0.71 Materials/components, which can disturb certain recycling processes: >PC< / brass 0.16 Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread insert. Circuit boards 0.33 Under LC display unit subtotal 0.49 Materials/components, through which benefits can normally be achieved: Stainless steel 0.18 Handle, ratchet disk, Aluminium 0.15 Rotary control button, mounting sheets, … >PC< 0.42 Lower housing, holder for handle, battery-cover Rubber 0.05 O-Rings, rubberbase, rubber tube of handle, keypad sealing subtotal 0.80 7-12

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Recycling

Recycling data of master device Recycling/material code

Weight approx. (kg)

Description

Materials/components, which must be removed and treated separately: LCD - display 0.22 Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 – 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg) Lithium-ion battery 0.49 Located inside the battery compartment subtotal 0.71 Materials/components, which can disturb certain recycling processes: >PC< / brass 0.16 Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread insert. Circuit boards 0.33 Under LC display unit subtotal 0.49 Materials/components, through which benefits can normally be achieved: Stainless steel 0.18 Handle, ratchet disk, Aluminium 0.15 Rotary control button, mounting sheets, … >PC< 0.42 Lower housing, holder for handle, battery-cover Rubber 0.05 O-Rings, rubberbase, rubber tube of handle, keypad sealing subtotal 0.80 7-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling


Weight approx. (kg)

Description

Composite materials*: Membrane keypad subtotal

0.20 0.20

Foil/aluminium/glass/spring steel/stainless steel

Total

2.20

Mounting material, cables, clamps, screws ...

0.16

Total weight (incl. battery)

2.36

Special notes: none * Materials/components, which cannot be separated into mono materials by destructive mechanical processes

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


Recycling


7-13

Weight approx. (kg)

Description

Composite materials*: Membrane keypad subtotal

0.20 0.20

Foil/aluminium/glass/spring steel/stainless steel

Total

2.20

Mounting material, cables, clamps, screws ...

0.16

Total weight (incl. battery)

2.36

Special notes: none * Materials/components, which cannot be separated into mono materials by destructive mechanical processes

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

7-13

7-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

7-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and peripherals

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Interfaces and peripherals

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8

8-1

8

8-1

Interfaces and Peripherals

8.1

Interfaces

Interfaces

The USM 35X presents different interfaces for the connection of external units and for the data exchange. All interfaces are located at the instrument front. The following figure gives an overview of the position of interfaces.

8-2

Issue 01, 04/2005


8.1

Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces

Interfaces

The USM 35X presents different interfaces for the connection of external units and for the data exchange. All interfaces are located at the instrument front. The following figure gives an overview of the position of interfaces.

8-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Interfaces

1 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of the transmitter probe (black ring) 2 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of the receiver probe (red ring) 3 RS 232 serial interface, 9-way Sub-D socket 4 I/O analog interface, 8-way LEMO-1-B socket 5 RGB-OUT VGA interface, 10-way LEMO-1-B socket 6 12V DC Mains connection socket, 4-way LEMO-0-B socket

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-3


Interfaces

1 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of the transmitter probe (black ring) 2 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of the receiver probe (red ring) 3 RS 232 serial interface, 9-way Sub-D socket 4 I/O analog interface, 8-way LEMO-1-B socket 5 RGB-OUT VGA interface, 10-way LEMO-1-B socket 6 12V DC Mains connection socket, 4-way LEMO-0-B socket

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-3


8.2

I/O interface

I/O interface

The USM 35X has an 8-way I/O interface (LEMO-1-B socket) for different input and output signals: • SAP output (transmitter trigger pulse) • Alarm output (TTL): switching delay approx. 50 ms, hold time approx. 500 ms. • TDR input (test data release) • Analog output H Note:

View of the 8-way LEMO-1-B socket

You are able to externally process the alarm condition with the alarm output, e.g. for sorting and other control purposes. Error alarms can be triggered under certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored.

8-4

Issue 01, 04/2005


8.2

Krautkramer USM 35X

I/O interface

I/O interface

The USM 35X has an 8-way I/O interface (LEMO-1-B socket) for different input and output signals: • SAP output (transmitter trigger pulse) • Alarm output (TTL): switching delay approx. 50 ms, hold time approx. 500 ms. • TDR input (test data release) • Analog output H Note:

View of the 8-way LEMO-1-B socket

You are able to externally process the alarm condition with the alarm output, e.g. for sorting and other control purposes. Error alarms can be triggered under certain circumstances. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms occuring during instrument operation (setting of functions) are to be ignored.

8-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


I/O interface

Contact assignment of the LEMO-1-B socket Contact Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

SAP alarm A alarm B unassigned unassigned TDR Analog output, amplitude or time of flight (selectable via remote-control code, see chapter 8.4 Remote Control) GND

Signal direction

Level

Colour (UM 25*)

output output output – – input output

TTL TTL TTL – – TTL active high 0–5V

white grey yellow pink black blue green

ground

–

brown

*UM 25: analog cable (35 268)

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-5


I/O interface

Contact assignment of the LEMO-1-B socket Contact Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

SAP alarm A alarm B unassigned unassigned TDR Analog output, amplitude or time of flight (selectable via remote-control code, see chapter 8.4 Remote Control) GND

Signal direction

Level

Colour (UM 25*)

output output output – – input output

TTL TTL TTL – – TTL active high 0–5V

white grey yellow pink black blue green

ground

–

brown

*UM 25: analog cable (35 268)

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-5


8.3

RS 232 interface

RS 232 interface

Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket Contact Designation

The USM 35X has a RS 232 interface for remote control and documentation (report printout).

View of the 9-way Sub-D socket

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

unassigned RXD TXD DTR ground DSR RTS CTS unassigned

Signal direction

Level

– input output output – input output input –

– RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 –

H Note: Switch off the instrument before connecting a cable to the RS 232 socket or before withdrawing any plugs.

8-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


8.3

RS 232 interface

RS 232 interface

Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket Contact Designation

The USM 35X has a RS 232 interface for remote control and documentation (report printout).

View of the 9-way Sub-D socket

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

unassigned RXD TXD DTR ground DSR RTS CTS unassigned

Signal direction

Level

– input output output – input output input –

– RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 –

H Note: Switch off the instrument before connecting a cable to the RS 232 socket or before withdrawing any plugs.

8-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


RGB interface

8.4

RGB interface

H Note:

The RGB interface serves for the output of the VGA signal. You can use this interface to connect the USM 35X with a monitor or with a VGA projector (beamer). The current display contents are then transferred to the external unit and can be further used accordingly.

Before you are able to use the RGB interface, you have to activate the function VGA in the function group LCD first.

H Note: For technical reasons it is unfortunately not possible to maintain a stable synchronisation of both displays if the VGA output is active. The external signal for the connected monitor or beamer is entirely synchronised. A flickering of the internal display has to be accepted though. The internal display will be synchronous as soon as the VGA output has been deactivated. The interface is a 10-way socket type Lemo-0-B. The standard contact assignment makes it suitable for all VGA output units. Use the VGA adapter UM 31 (order number 35 653) in order to connect a VGA output unit.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005


RGB interface

8.4

8-7

RGB interface

H Note:

The RGB interface serves for the output of the VGA signal. You can use this interface to connect the USM 35X with a monitor or with a VGA projector (beamer). The current display contents are then transferred to the external unit and can be further used accordingly.

Before you are able to use the RGB interface, you have to activate the function VGA in the function group LCD first.

H Note: For technical reasons it is unfortunately not possible to maintain a stable synchronisation of both displays if the VGA output is active. The external signal for the connected monitor or beamer is entirely synchronised. A flickering of the internal display has to be accepted though. The internal display will be synchronous as soon as the VGA output has been deactivated. The interface is a 10-way socket type Lemo-0-B. The standard contact assignment makes it suitable for all VGA output units. Use the VGA adapter UM 31 (order number 35 653) in order to connect a VGA output unit.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-7


8.5

Data exchange

Data exchange

Activation of serial communication

• transfer A-scans for documentation,

After connecting the instrument to the PC you must run a software that opens the serial port. This can either be a commercial terminal program (e.g. Microsoft Hyper Terminal) or a customised program like UltraDOC. Make sure that the serial communication parameters on the PC are identical to those of the instrument.

• transfer instrument settings in ASCII format,

The data transmission parameters are as follows:

• transfer reports from stored datasets,

Baud rate:

The USM 35X is equipped with the serial interface RS 232 for bi-directional data communication with a PC. When you connect the instrument with a PC you can: • remote control the instrument via the PC,

• transfers Datalogger jobs in ASCII format (option) • read and write datasets in binary format.

Connecting a printer or a PC You can connect the USM 35X to a printer or a PC using the special Krautkramer cables: PC: Printer:

UD 20 (25-way) or UD 31 (9-way) UD 31 (Seiko DPU) or UD 32 (Epson)

Please refer to chapter 2. 8-8

0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, and 57600 Word length: 8 data bits (fixed) Parity: none (fixed) Stop bits: 2 (fixed) The baud rate can be set in the function BAUD-R in the menu CFG1 from the third operating level. The settings on the USM 35X apply to most of the printers and PCs. To ensure a perfect communication, please check the settings of the connected peripherals and adjust them to the parameters of the USM 35X.

Issue 01, 04/2005


8.5

Krautkramer USM 35X

Data exchange

Data exchange

Activation of serial communication

• transfer A-scans for documentation,

After connecting the instrument to the PC you must run a software that opens the serial port. This can either be a commercial terminal program (e.g. Microsoft Hyper Terminal) or a customised program like UltraDOC. Make sure that the serial communication parameters on the PC are identical to those of the instrument.

• transfer instrument settings in ASCII format,

The data transmission parameters are as follows:

• transfer reports from stored datasets,

Baud rate:

The USM 35X is equipped with the serial interface RS 232 for bi-directional data communication with a PC. When you connect the instrument with a PC you can: • remote control the instrument via the PC,

• transfers Datalogger jobs in ASCII format (option) • read and write datasets in binary format.

Connecting a printer or a PC You can connect the USM 35X to a printer or a PC using the special Krautkramer cables: PC: Printer:

UD 20 (25-way) or UD 31 (9-way) UD 31 (Seiko DPU) or UD 32 (Epson)

Please refer to chapter 2. 8-8

0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, and 57600 Word length: 8 data bits (fixed) Parity: none (fixed) Stop bits: 2 (fixed) The baud rate can be set in the function BAUD-R in the menu CFG1 from the third operating level. The settings on the USM 35X apply to most of the printers and PCs. To ensure a perfect communication, please check the settings of the connected peripherals and adjust them to the parameters of the USM 35X.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Data exchange

Printing data

8.6

The USM 35X enables a direct printout of data, for example a report including the echo display and the instrument settings.

You can use a connected PC for the remote control of the USM 35X.

To do this, select the printer driver in the function PRINTER (function group CFG1) and just press the key after having initialized and activated the printer. The data selected by you in the function COPYMOD (function group CFG1) are printed. For more details on this, please refer to chapter 6.

Remote control

The data transfer is carried out by means of a remote control program and the corresponding remote control commands. These commands represent instructions referring to the individual functions of the USM 35X. The program Crosstalk can for example be used as remote control program under DOS. In Windows based systems it is possible to use e.g. the Terminal program. After the remote control program has been started and the program interface has been configured, the commands are input via the keyboard of the computer. In this connection, please observe the following differentiation: • Interrogation of a value or state of a USM 35X function using the command structure:

The USM 35X transmits the value of the current setting. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-9


Data exchange

Printing data

8.6

The USM 35X enables a direct printout of data, for example a report including the echo display and the instrument settings.

You can use a connected PC for the remote control of the USM 35X.

To do this, select the printer driver in the function PRINTER (function group CFG1) and just press the key after having initialized and activated the printer. The data selected by you in the function COPYMOD (function group CFG1) are printed. For more details on this, please refer to chapter 6.

Remote control

The data transfer is carried out by means of a remote control program and the corresponding remote control commands. These commands represent instructions referring to the individual functions of the USM 35X. The program Crosstalk can for example be used as remote control program under DOS. In Windows based systems it is possible to use e.g. the Terminal program. After the remote control program has been started and the program interface has been configured, the commands are input via the keyboard of the computer. In this connection, please observe the following differentiation: • Interrogation of a value or state of a USM 35X function using the command structure:

The USM 35X transmits the value of the current setting. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-9


Remote control

• Entry of a new value or state of a function using the command structure:

dw 19200 A resolution of 0.1 means:

All values are entered or transmitted by the USM 35X without a comma or a point. The resolution of the function should therefore be observed with all values. The resolution of a function applies to the entire value range of that function. A resolution of 0.01 means:

The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multiplied by the factor of 10. The entry of a value must be done multiplied by the factor of 10. Example: • Setting of the gain to 51.5 dB

The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multiplied by the factor of 100. The entry of a value must be done multiplied by the factor of 100.

db 515 A resolution of 1 means: The USM 35X transmits the value of a function without multiplication. The entry of a value must be done without any multiplication.

Examples • Setting of the display delay to 72.39 mm: dd 7239

Example:

• Setting of the display width to 72.3 mm:

• Setting the response threshold of gate a to 41 %:

dw 7230

8-10

• Setting of the display width to 192 mm:

at 41

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

• Entry of a new value or state of a function using the command structure:

A resolution of 0.01 means:

dd 7239 • Setting of the display width to 72.3 mm: dw 7230

8-10

The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multiplied by the factor of 10. The entry of a value must be done multiplied by the factor of 10. Example: • Setting of the gain to 51.5 dB

The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multiplied by the factor of 100. The entry of a value must be done multiplied by the factor of 100.

• Setting of the display delay to 72.39 mm:

dw 19200 A resolution of 0.1 means:

All values are entered or transmitted by the USM 35X without a comma or a point. The resolution of the function should therefore be observed with all values. The resolution of a function applies to the entire value range of that function.

Examples

• Setting of the display width to 192 mm:

db 515 A resolution of 1 means: The USM 35X transmits the value of a function without multiplication. The entry of a value must be done without any multiplication. Example: • Setting the response threshold of gate a to 41 %: at 41

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Syntax and timing The syntax and timing of the communication with the instrument is as follows:

With: ESC

= escape (ASCII CHR 27)

*

= star (ASCII CHR 42)

AB

= remote code of an instrument function

CR

= carriage return (ASCII CHR 13)

|_|

= Space (ASCII CHR 32)

n Bytes = function value of function AB ETX

= end of text (ASCII CHR 3)

LF

= line feed (ASCII CHR 10)

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-11


Remote control

Syntax and timing The syntax and timing of the communication with the instrument is as follows:

With: ESC

= escape (ASCII CHR 27)

*

= star (ASCII CHR 42)

AB

= remote code of an instrument function

CR

= carriage return (ASCII CHR 13)

|_|

= Space (ASCII CHR 32)

n Bytes = function value of function AB ETX

= end of text (ASCII CHR 3)

LF

= line feed (ASCII CHR 10)

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-11


Remote control

Transmission timing • As soon as the instrument has received the ESC command, is will return the * which then will be displayed on PC screen. • Then you key in the wanted remote code according to the given table. The instrument echoes your entries. • Finally you hit the [CR]-key on your keyboard or send the CR-command (closing the remote command). • The instrument will now return a blank, then the related function value which may consist of several Bytes, then the “end of text” character, and finally the carriage return and the line feed character.

8-12

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Remote control

Transmission timing • As soon as the instrument has received the ESC command, is will return the * which then will be displayed on PC screen. • Then you key in the wanted remote code according to the given table. The instrument echoes your entries. • Finally you hit the [CR]-key on your keyboard or send the CR-command (closing the remote command). • The instrument will now return a blank, then the related function value which may consist of several Bytes, then the “end of text” character, and finally the carriage return and the line feed character.

8-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Example: Request RANGE value from the USM 35X

Remote code of the range function is DW (display width). Please note that numerical function values are always returned as integer values with the given maximum resolution, here DW = 5000 means 50.00 mm. Example: Request reading at position 2 in the measurement line

Remote code of measurement position 2 is E2 (evaluation 2). E2 = 10.81 means 10.81 mm (here sound path of the echo in gate A had been displayed). Please note that all readings are shown in that applicable decimal format where the decimal separator is a dot.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-13


Remote control

Example: Request RANGE value from the USM 35X

Remote code of the range function is DW (display width). Please note that numerical function values are always returned as integer values with the given maximum resolution, here DW = 5000 means 50.00 mm. Example: Request reading at position 2 in the measurement line

Remote code of measurement position 2 is E2 (evaluation 2). E2 = 10.81 means 10.81 mm (here sound path of the echo in gate A had been displayed). Please note that all readings are shown in that applicable decimal format where the decimal separator is a dot.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-13


Remote control

Changing a function value Key in [ESC] DW [Space] 2000 [CR] in order to set the range to 20.00 mm:

Please note that you must key in the function value as an integer with the maximum given resolution, here 2000 for the range of 20 mm. Alphanumerical entries Key in [ESC] DN [Space] Weld inspection B 45/2 [CR] in order to enter the dataset name (DATNAME) “Weld inspection B 45/2”. All alphanumerical entries may have a maximum length of 24 characters. In case the string length exceeds 24 characters, it will automatically be cut to 24 characters. With the other alpahnumerical fields in the TESTINF table you may easily describe the dataset.

8-14

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Remote control

Changing a function value Key in [ESC] DW [Space] 2000 [CR] in order to set the range to 20.00 mm:

Please note that you must key in the function value as an integer with the maximum given resolution, here 2000 for the range of 20 mm. Alphanumerical entries Key in [ESC] DN [Space] Weld inspection B 45/2 [CR] in order to enter the dataset name (DATNAME) “Weld inspection B 45/2”. All alphanumerical entries may have a maximum length of 24 characters. In case the string length exceeds 24 characters, it will automatically be cut to 24 characters. With the other alpahnumerical fields in the TESTINF table you may easily describe the dataset.

8-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Transfer of datasets A total of 800 datasets (complete instrument setup including A-scan) can be stored in the instrument. The stored datasets including the actual setting (dataset # 0) can be transferred to the PC in compressed binary format for archiving purposes. If required, the datasets may be downloaded back to the insturment for re-use or echo comparison. This bi-directional dataset transfer is part of the software UltraDOC. Actual dataset (# 0) from the instrument to the PC:

v1 ... vn describes the software version of the USM, bytes b1 ... bn contain the instrument setting including A-scan. In order to store this information you must write the transferred bytes v1 ... vn, CR, LF, b1 ... bn into a file. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-15


Remote control

Transfer of datasets A total of 800 datasets (complete instrument setup including A-scan) can be stored in the instrument. The stored datasets including the actual setting (dataset # 0) can be transferred to the PC in compressed binary format for archiving purposes. If required, the datasets may be downloaded back to the insturment for re-use or echo comparison. This bi-directional dataset transfer is part of the software UltraDOC. Actual dataset (# 0) from the instrument to the PC:

v1 ... vn describes the software version of the USM, bytes b1 ... bn contain the instrument setting including A-scan. In order to store this information you must write the transferred bytes v1 ... vn, CR, LF, b1 ... bn into a file. Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-15


Remote control

Dataset file from the PC to the instrument’s dataset #1:

*) at this time the instruments waits for the reception of the bytes v1 ... vn CR LF b1 ... bn. The instrument now checks whether received dataset is compatible with the current software version of the instrument, and whether the dataset is valid (correct checksum).

8-16

Issue 01, 04/2005


Krautkramer USM 35X

Remote control

Dataset file from the PC to the instrument’s dataset #1:

*) at this time the instruments waits for the reception of the bytes v1 ... vn CR LF b1 ... bn. The instrument now checks whether received dataset is compatible with the current software version of the instrument, and whether the dataset is valid (correct checksum).

8-16

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Functions and remote control codes

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Presettings are in bold-face type. You will find a brief description of all functions in chapter 9.1 Function directory.

aLOGIC

AM

0 = off 1 = pos 2 = neg

1

If not otherwise stated, all values refer to steel, C = 5920 m/s.

AMPLCOR**

AC

-25 to +25 dB / 0

0.1

ANAMODE

AQ

0 = 0 volt 1 = 5 volts

ANGLE

PA

0 - 90 / 0

0.1

A-SCAN

AS

0 = stndard 1 = compare 2 = envelop 3 = peak b 4 = afreeze 5 = bfreeze 6 = cfreeze***

1

aSTART

AD

0 - 9999 mm / 35 0 - 250" / 1.500

0.01 0.001

aTHRSH

AT

10 - 90 % / 40 -90 - -10 % additionally with rf

1

ATTENR

BC

0 - 1101 dB

0.1

The functions marked with * are only available in the USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S (DAC evaluation), the functions marked with ** are only available in the USM 35X S (DGS evaluation). Functions which are only availabe in connection with the Data Logger option are marked with *** (please also refer to the section Remote control in chapter Option Data Logger on this subject). Read only functions are marked with R.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-17


Remote control

Functions and remote control codes

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Presettings are in bold-face type. You will find a brief description of all functions in chapter 9.1 Function directory.

aLOGIC

AM

0 = off 1 = pos 2 = neg

1

If not otherwise stated, all values refer to steel, C = 5920 m/s.

AMPLCOR**

AC

-25 to +25 dB / 0

0.1

ANAMODE

AQ

0 = 0 volt 1 = 5 volts

ANGLE

PA

0 - 90 / 0

0.1

A-SCAN

AS

0 = stndard 1 = compare 2 = envelop 3 = peak b 4 = afreeze 5 = bfreeze 6 = cfreeze***

1

aSTART

AD

0 - 9999 mm / 35 0 - 250" / 1.500

0.01 0.001

aTHRSH

AT


1

ATTENR

BC

0 - 1101 dB

0.1

The functions marked with * are only available in the USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S (DAC evaluation), the functions marked with ** are only available in the USM 35X S (DGS evaluation). Functions which are only availabe in connection with the Data Logger option are marked with *** (please also refer to the section Remote control in chapter Option Data Logger on this subject). Read only functions are marked with R.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-17


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

ATT-OBJ**

AO

0 - 100 dB/m / 0

0.1

BOLDLI

DV

ATT-REF**

AR

0 - 100 dB/m / 0

0.1

aWIDTH

AW

0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.004 - 250" / 1.500

0.01 0.001

0 = off 1=L 2=M 3=H 4=U 5=T 6=a

BAUD-R

BR

0=0 1= 300 2 = 600 3 = 1200 4 = 2400 5 = 4800 6 = 9600 7 = 19200 8 = 38400 9 = 57600

bSTART

2D

0 - 9999 mm / 85 0 - 250" / 3.500

0.01 0.001

bTHRSH

2T


1

bWIDTH

2W

0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.004 - 250" / 1.500

0.01 0.001

CAL

CA

read only

COLOR

CH

0 = off 1=1 2=2

COMMENT

CO

alphanumerical input

bLOGIC

2L

0 = off 1 = pos 2 = neg 3 = a trig

Resolution

1

8-18

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

ATT-OBJ**

AO

0 - 100 dB/m / 0

0.1

BOLDLI

DV

ATT-REF**

AR

0 - 100 dB/m / 0

0.1

aWIDTH

AW

0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.004 - 250" / 1.500

0.01 0.001

0 = off 1=L 2=M 3=H 4=U 5=T 6=a

BAUD-R

BR

0=0 1= 300 2 = 600 3 = 1200 4 = 2400 5 = 4800 6 = 9600 7 = 19200 8 = 38400 9 = 57600

bSTART

2D

0 - 9999 mm / 85 0 - 250" / 3.500

0.01 0.001

bTHRSH

2T


1

bWIDTH

2W

0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.004 - 250" / 1.500

0.01 0.001

CAL

CA

read only

COLOR

CH

0 = off 1=1 2=2

COMMENT

CO


bLOGIC

8-18

2L

0 = off 1 = pos 2 = neg 3 = a trig

Resolution

1

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

COPYMOD

CM

0 = hardcpy 1 = report 2 = meas P1 3 = pardump 4 = PCX 5 = store 6 = datalog*** 7 = off 8 = special

1

D eff**

XD

3 - 35 mm / 9.7 0.120 - 1.400" / 0.380 (only for probe-# 0)

0.01 0.001

D-DELAY

DD

-10 - 1024 mm / 0 -0.3 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

DELALL

EX

0 = off 1 = on

DELETE

EA

0 = off 1 = on

1

DEL-VEL**

VV

1000 - 15000 m/s / 2730 (only for probe-# 0)

1

DGS-CRV**

DU

0.5 - 35 mm / 3.0 0.02 - 1.400 / 0.1

0.01 0.001

DGSMENU

T5

0 = off 1 = on

DGSMOD**

DS

0 = off 1 = on

1

DGS-REF**

DR

0 = off 1 = on

1

DACECHO*

TE

0 - 10 / 0

1

DACMOD*

TM

0 = off 1 = DAC 2 = TCG

1

1

DAMPING

PG

0 = low 1 = high

DATE

DE

numerical input e.g. 26-01-99

DATNAME

DN


DBSTEP

ST

6.5 ... 20 dB

0.1

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-19



Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

COPYMOD

CM

0 = hardcpy 1 = report 2 = meas P1 3 = pardump 4 = PCX 5 = store 6 = datalog*** 7 = off 8 = special

1

D eff**

XD

3 - 35 mm / 9.7 0.120 - 1.400" / 0.380 (only for probe-# 0)

0.01 0.001

D-DELAY

DD

-10 - 1024 mm / 0 -0.3 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

DELALL

EX

0 = off 1 = on

DELETE

EA

0 = off 1 = on

1

DEL-VEL**

VV

1000 - 15000 m/s / 2730 (only for probe-# 0)

1

DGS-CRV**

DU

0.5 - 35 mm / 3.0 0.02 - 1.400 / 0.1

0.01 0.001

DGSMENU

T5

0 = off 1 = on

DGSMOD**

DS

0 = off 1 = on

1

DGS-REF**

DR

0 = off 1 = on

1

DACECHO*

TE

0 - 10 / 0

1

DACMOD*

TM

0 = off 1 = DAC 2 = TCG

1

1

DAMPING

PG

0 = low 1 = high

DATE

DE

numerical input e.g. 26-01-99

DATNAME

DN


DBSTEP

ST

6.5 ... 20 dB

Krautkramer USM 35X

0.1

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-19


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

DIALOG

DG

0 = German 1 = English 2 = French 3 = Italian 4 = Spanish 5 = Portuguese 6 = Dutch 7 = Swedish 8 = Slovenian 9 = Romanian 10 = Finnish 11 = Czech 12 = Danish 13 = Hungarian 14 = Croatian 15 = Russian 16 = Slovakian 17 = Norwegian 18 = Polish 19 = Japanese

1

DUAL

DM

0 = off 1 = on

1

EVAMOD

EM

0 = DAC 1 = DGS 2 = REF 5 = JISDAC

1

FILLED

FI

0 = off 1 = on

1

FINE G

FG

–10 - +30 / 0

1

FLAWIND

FB


FLAWLEN

FL

0 - 999 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

FREQU

FR

1

0.1 / 0.01

0 = 0.5 - 4 MHz 1 = 2 - 20 MHz 2 = 0.8 - 8 MHz 3 = 0.2 - 1 MHz

GAIN

DB

0 - 110 dB / 30

0.1

HORN

HO

0 = off 1 = on

1

DIAMET

OD

10 - 2000 mm / 0.4 - 800" 800.01" = flat

DIR

T3

0 = off 1 = on

8-20

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

DIALOG

DG

0 = German 1 = English 2 = French 3 = Italian 4 = Spanish 5 = Portuguese 6 = Dutch 7 = Swedish 8 = Slovenian 9 = Romanian 10 = Finnish 11 = Czech 12 = Danish 13 = Hungarian 14 = Croatian 15 = Russian 16 = Slovakian 17 = Norwegian 18 = Polish 19 = Japanese

1

DUAL

DM

0 = off 1 = on

1

EVAMOD

EM

0 = DAC 1 = DGS 2 = REF 5 = JISDAC

1

FILLED

FI

0 = off 1 = on

1

FINE G

FG

–10 - +30 / 0

1

FLAWIND

FB


FLAWLEN

FL

0 - 999 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

FREQU

FR

1

0.1 / 0.01

0 = 0.5 - 4 MHz 1 = 2 - 20 MHz 2 = 0.8 - 8 MHz 3 = 0.2 - 1 MHz

GAIN

DB

0 - 110 dB / 30

0.1

HORN

HO

0 = off 1 = on

1

DIAMET

OD

10 - 2000 mm / 0.4 - 800" 800.01" = flat

DIR

T3

0 = off 1 = on

8-20

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X



Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

INDICAR

BA

-1101 - 1101 dB

0.1

PRBFREQ**

XF

0.5 - 10.0 MHz

0.04

LIGHT

LT

0 = off 1 = on

1

PRBNAME**

PN


PREVIEW

T2

MAGNIFY

MA

0 = off 1 = aGAT 2 = bGAT

1

0 = off 1 = on

PRF-MOD

PF

10 steps: 0 = step 1 1 = step 2 2 = step 3 3 = step 4 4 = step 5 5 = step 6 6 = step 7 7 = step 8 8 = step 9 9 = step 10

MEAS-P1 MEAS-P2 MEAS-P3 MEAS-P4

M1 M2 M3 M4

Setting range see S-DISP

1

MTLVEL

SV

1000 - 15000 m/s / 5920 40 - 600 "/ms / 233

1 0.1

OBJECT

OB


OFFSET*

TO

0 - 14 dB / 0

OPERAT

PE


P-DELAY

PD

0 - 199.99 µs / 0

0.01

POWER

PI

0 = low 1 = high

1

PRINTER

0.5

Krautkramer USM 35X

PR

0 = Epson 1 = HP Laserjet 2 = HP Deskjet 3 = DPU-41x 4 = HP Laserjet 1200 series 5 = HP Deskjet 1200 series

1

1

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-21



Code

Range/Default

Resolution

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

INDICAR

BA

-1101 - 1101 dB

0.1

PRBFREQ**

XF

0.5 - 10.0 MHz

0.04

LIGHT

LT

0 = off 1 = on

1

PRBNAME**

PN


PREVIEW

T2

MAGNIFY

MA

0 = off 1 = aGAT 2 = bGAT

1

0 = off 1 = on

PRF-MOD

PF

10 steps: 0 = step 1 1 = step 2 2 = step 3 3 = step 4 4 = step 5 5 = step 6 6 = step 7 7 = step 8 8 = step 9 9 = step 10


M1 M2 M3 M4

Setting range see S-DISP

1

MTLVEL

SV

1000 - 15000 m/s / 5920 40 - 600 "/ms / 233

1 0.1

OBJECT

OB


OFFSET*

TO

0 - 14 dB / 0

OPERAT

PE


P-DELAY

PD

0 - 199.99 µs / 0

0.01

POWER

PI

0 = low 1 = high

1

Krautkramer USM 35X

0.5

PRINTER

Issue 01, 04/2005

PR

0 = Epson 1 = HP Laserjet 2 = HP Deskjet 3 = DPU-41x 4 = HP Laserjet 1200 series 5 = HP Deskjet 1200 series

1

1

8-21


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

PROBE-#**

PB

0 = variable / alphanumerical input 1 = B1-S 13 = SWB45-2 2 = B2-S 14 = SWB60-2 3 = B4-s 15 = SWB70-2 4 = MB2-S 16 = SWB45-5 5 = MB4-S 17 = SWB60-5 6 = MB5-S 18 = SWB70-5 7 = MWB45-2 19 = WB45-1 8 = MWB60-2 20 = WB60-1 9 = MWB70-2 21 = WB70-1 10 = MWB45-4 22 = WB45-2 11 = MWB60-4 23 = WB60-2 12 = MWB70-4 24 = WB70-2

RANGE

DW

0.5 - 4 MHz / 0.2 - 1 MHz: 0.5 - 9999 mm / 250 0.02 - 390" / 10

Resolution

0.01 0.001

2 - 20 / 0.8 - 8 MHz: 0.5 - 1420 mm / 250 0.02 - 56" / 10

0.01 0.001

RATINGR

BD

-1101 - 1101 db

0.1

RECALL

RD

0 = off 1 = on

1

8-22

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

RECTIFY

RF

0 = full-w 1= pos hw 2 = neg hw 3 = rf

1

REFECHO

RC

0 = no ref. 1 = ref. stored

REFECHO**

RE

0 = BW 1 = SDH 2 = FDH

REFMODE

RO

0 = off 1 = on

REFRNCER

BB

0 - 1101 dB

0.1

REFSIZE**

RS

0.5 - 10 mm / 3

0.01

REJECT

RJ

0 - 80 % / 0

1

SCALE

SE

0 = measval 1 = snd-pth. 2 = div.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

PROBE-#**

PB

0 = variable / alphanumerical input 1 = B1-S 13 = SWB45-2 2 = B2-S 14 = SWB60-2 3 = B4-s 15 = SWB70-2 4 = MB2-S 16 = SWB45-5 5 = MB4-S 17 = SWB60-5 6 = MB5-S 18 = SWB70-5 7 = MWB45-2 19 = WB45-1 8 = MWB60-2 20 = WB60-1 9 = MWB70-2 21 = WB70-1 10 = MWB45-4 22 = WB45-2 11 = MWB60-4 23 = WB60-2 12 = MWB70-4 24 = WB70-2

RANGE

DW

0.5 - 4 MHz / 0.2 - 1 MHz: 0.5 - 9999 mm / 250 0.02 - 390" / 10

Resolution

0.01 0.001

2 - 20 / 0.8 - 8 MHz: 0.5 - 1420 mm / 250 0.02 - 56" / 10

0.01 0.001

RATINGR

BD

-1101 - 1101 db

0.1

RECALL

RD

0 = off 1 = on

1

8-22

1

Function

Code

Range/Default

Resolution

RECTIFY

RF

0 = full-w 1= pos hw 2 = neg hw 3 = rf

1

REFECHO

RC

0 = no ref. 1 = ref. stored

REFECHO**

RE

0 = BW 1 = SDH 2 = FDH

REFMODE

RO

0 = off 1 = on

REFRNCER

BB

0 - 1101 dB

0.1

REFSIZE**

RS

0.5 - 10 mm / 3

0.01

REJECT

RJ

0 - 80 % / 0

1

SCALE

SE

0 = measval 1 = snd-pth. 2 = div.

Issue 01, 04/2005

1

Krautkramer USM 35X



Code

Range/Default

SCHEME

CS

0 = green/black 1 = orange/black 2 = black/white 3 = black/yellow

S-DISP

VS

0=off 2=Sb 4=Sc-a*** 6=Sb-a*** 8=Hb % 10=Ha dB 12=Hc dB*** 14=R-end 16=Db 18=Pa 20=Pc*** 22=Rb 24=ERS 26=Ha %crv 28=Hc %crv*** 30=DGS-Crv 32=freeLoc*** 34=freeLoJ 36=La 38=Lc 40=Defdpth 42=DAC dB 44=Gr dB

Resolution

1=Sa 1 3=Sc*** 5=Sc-b*** 7=Ha % 9=Hc %*** 11=Hb dB 13=R-start 15=Da 17=Dc*** 19=Pb 21=Ra 23=Rc*** 25=Gt dB 27=Hb %crv 29=Alarm 31=freeJob*** 33=freeAsc*** 35=lastLoc 37=Lb 39=Gatewid 41=class 43=LOC-#

Krautkramer USM 35X

Function

Code

Range/Default

SETTING

T4

0 = off 1 = on

SET-#

ND

1 - 800 / 1

1

S-REF1

R1

0 - 5000 mm / 50 0 - 200" / 2.0

0.01 0.001

S-REF2

R2

0 - 5000 mm / 100 0 - 200" / 4.0

0.01 0.001

STO-INF

SC

0 = off 1 = on

1

STORE

SD

0 = off 1 = on

1

SURFACE

SU


T-CORR *

DC

-24 - +24 dB / 0

TESTINF

T1

0 = off 1 = on

THICKNE

TH

1 - 9999 mm / 25 0.05 - 400" / 1

0.01 0.001

8-23


Function

Code

Range/Default

SCHEME

CS

0 = green/black 1 = orange/black 2 = black/white 3 = black/yellow

VS

0.5

Issue 01, 04/2005

Remote control

S-DISP

Resolution

0=off 2=Sb 4=Sc-a*** 6=Sb-a*** 8=Hb % 10=Ha dB 12=Hc dB*** 14=R-end 16=Db 18=Pa 20=Pc*** 22=Rb 24=ERS 26=Ha %crv 28=Hc %crv*** 30=DGS-Crv 32=freeLoc*** 34=freeLoJ 36=La 38=Lc 40=Defdpth 42=DAC dB 44=Gr dB

Krautkramer USM 35X

Resolution

1=Sa 1 3=Sc*** 5=Sc-b*** 7=Ha % 9=Hc %*** 11=Hb dB 13=R-start 15=Da 17=Dc*** 19=Pb 21=Ra 23=Rc*** 25=Gt dB 27=Hb %crv 29=Alarm 31=freeJob*** 33=freeAsc*** 35=lastLoc 37=Lb 39=Gatewid 41=class 43=LOC-#

Function

Code

Range/Default

SETTING

T4

0 = off 1 = on

SET-#

ND

1 - 800 / 1

1

S-REF1

R1

0 - 5000 mm / 50 0 - 200" / 2.0

0.01 0.001

S-REF2

R2

0 - 5000 mm / 100 0 - 200" / 4.0

0.01 0.001

STO-INF

SC

0 = off 1 = on

1

STORE

SD

0 = off 1 = on

1

SURFACE

SU


T-CORR *

DC

-24 - +24 dB / 0

TESTINF

T1

0 = off 1 = on

THICKNE

TH

1 - 9999 mm / 25 0.05 - 400" / 1

Issue 01, 04/2005

Resolution

0.5

0.01 0.001

8-23


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

TIME

TI

numerical input, e.g. 12:30:00

TOF

AF

0 = flank 1 = peak 2 = jflank

1

1

UNIT

UN

0 = mm 1 = inch

VGA

VG

0 = off 1 = on

Resolution

X-POS

XP

0 - 999 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

X-VALUE

XV

0 - 100 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

0 - 999 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

Y-POS

YP

8-24

Other remote control codes Code

Function/description

<

Select the next left sided menu

>

Select the next right sided menu

AG

dB-Difference from the reference gain (ref. echo at 80 %) to the registration gain (maximum of selected DGS curve at 80 %), read only

AP

Analog output setting 0 = amplitude 1 = time of flight

DA

A-scan amplitudes transferred as binary data

DV

Send the DAC points in tics and dB, DAC, read only

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5

Read value form measurement line (position 1) Read value form measurement line (position 2) Read value form measurement line (position 3) Read value form measurement line (position 4) Read value displayed in the A-scan

EL

Send the contents of the LCD as binary data stream, read only

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Function

Code

Range/Default

TIME

TI

numerical input, e.g. 12:30:00

TOF

AF

0 = flank 1 = peak 2 = jflank

1

1

UNIT

UN

0 = mm 1 = inch

VGA

VG

0 = off 1 = on

Resolution

X-POS

XP

0 - 999 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

X-VALUE

XV

0 - 100 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

0 - 999 mm / 0 0 - 40" / 0

0.01 0.001

Y-POS

8-24

YP

Other remote control codes Code


<

Select the next left sided menu

>

Select the next right sided menu

AG

dB-Difference from the reference gain (ref. echo at 80 %) to the registration gain (maximum of selected DGS curve at 80 %), read only

AP

Analog output setting 0 = amplitude 1 = time of flight

DA

A-scan amplitudes transferred as binary data

DV

Send the DAC points in tics and dB, DAC, read only

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5

Read value form measurement line (position 1) Read value form measurement line (position 2) Read value form measurement line (position 3) Read value form measurement line (position 4) Read value displayed in the A-scan

EL

Send the contents of the LCD as binary data stream, read only

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Code


Code


EV

Read alarm LED status: 0 = no alarm 1 = alarm in A 2 = alarm in B 3 = alarm in A+B

TZ

Zoom on/off: 0 = off 1 = on

UD

Send data set as binary data

HD

Editable header data from report transferred as ASCII-format data

UR

Read data set as binary data

I1 I2

Set information line in the startup screen Set information line in the startup screen (up to 39 characters)

ID

Read instrument software version

RG

Reference gain (reference echo at 80 %), read only

SL

“Scroll home”: selection of the first function in every function group and of the left function group in every function group line.

TF

Freeze on/off: 0 = off 1 = on

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-25


Remote control Code


Code


EV

Read alarm LED status: 0 = no alarm 1 = alarm in A 2 = alarm in B 3 = alarm in A+B

TZ

Zoom on/off: 0 = off 1 = on

UD

Send data set as binary data

HD

Editable header data from report transferred as ASCII-format data

UR

Read data set as binary data

I1 I2

Set information line in the startup screen Set information line in the startup screen (up to 39 characters)

ID

Read instrument software version

RG

Reference gain (reference echo at 80 %), read only

SL

“Scroll home”: selection of the first function in every function group and of the left function group in every function group line.

TF

Freeze on/off: 0 = off 1 = on

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-25


Remote control

Control codes for the rotary knobs/ function keys Function

Key

Code

Range

Left-hand rotary knob/ gain

G+ G-

increment decrement

Right-hand rotary knob

K+ K-

increment decrement

dB-STEP

P

0 = 0.0 1 = 0.5 2 = 1.0 3 = 2.0 4 = 6.0 5 = 6.5 – 20

FREEZE

F

off / on

ZOOM

Z

off / on

COPY

C

off / on

8-26

Function

Key

Code

Range

ENTER

R

off / on

level

10

1st/2nd operation level

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control

Control codes for the rotary knobs/ function keys Function

Code

Range

Left-hand rotary knob/ gain

G+ G-

increment decrement

Right-hand rotary knob

K+ K-

increment decrement

dB-STEP

P

0 = 0.0 1 = 0.5 2 = 1.0 3 = 2.0 4 = 6.0 5 = 6.5 – 20

FREEZE

F

off / on

ZOOM

Z

off / on

COPY

C

off / on

8-26

Key

Function

Code

Range

ENTER

R

off / on

level

10

1st/2nd operation level

Issue 01, 04/2005

Key

Krautkramer USM 35X



Key

Code

Function

BASE

5

MEAS

5

PULS

6

MSEL

6

RECV

7

LCD

7

aGAT

8

CFG1

8

bGAT

9

CFG2

9

CAL

5

REF/DAC/ DGS/JDAC

6

TRIG

7

MEM

8

DATA

9

Krautkramer USM 35X

Function

Key

Key

Code

first

1

second

2

third

3

fourth

4

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-27



Code

Key

Code

Function

BASE

5

MEAS

5

PULS

6

MSEL

6

RECV

7

LCD

7

aGAT

8

CFG1

8

bGAT

9

CFG2

9

CAL

5

REF/DAC/ DGS/JDAC

6

TRIG

7

MEM

8

DATA

9

Krautkramer USM 35X

Function

Key

Key

Code

Code

first

1

second

2

third

3

fourth

4

Issue 01, 04/2005

8-27


A

Remote control

Attention:

In rare cases concerning remote control sequences, reading measurement values directly after changing a function value in the USM 35X, there could be errors as long as the instrument has not ended setting the value. In such cases, additional commands must be inserted into the remote control sequence before the measurement values are read. Example: If you create a remote control sequence, by which the sound path of an echo is read after freezing the Ascan, the command chain would be as follows: Command F E3 F ...

Answer

Description

50,74

“A-scan freeze” “Read sound path” “Disable A-scan freeze”

8-28

In the interests of security, insert additional read commands before reading the sound path, e.g.: Command

Answer

Description

... F DB DB DB DB E3 F ...

580 580 580 580 50,74

“A-scan freeze” “Read dB setting” “Read dB setting” “Read dB setting” “Read dB setting” “Read sound path” “Disable A-scan freeze”

With these measures you ensure that sufficient time has passed in order to completely execute the previous command (display freeze) before transferring the sound path. Finally, check your remote control sequence to see that the measurement values can be correctly read, and add further read commands if necessary.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X


A

Remote control

Attention:

In rare cases concerning remote control sequences, reading measurement values directly after changing a function value in the USM 35X, there could be errors as long as the instrument has not ended setting the value. In such cases, additional commands must be inserted into the remote control sequence before the measurement values are read. Example: If you create a remote control sequence, by which the sound path of an echo is read after freezing the Ascan, the command chain would be as follows: Command F E3 F ...

8-28

Answer

Description

50,74

“A-scan freeze” “Read sound path” “Disable A-scan freeze”

In the interests of security, insert additional read commands before reading the sound path, e.g.: Command

Answer

Description

... F DB DB DB DB E3 F ...

580 580 580 580 50,74

“A-scan freeze” “Read dB setting” “Read dB setting” “Read dB setting” “Read dB setting” “Read sound path” “Disable A-scan freeze”

With these measures you ensure that sufficient time has passed in order to completely execute the previous command (display freeze) before transferring the sound path. Finally, check your remote control sequence to see that the measurement values can be correctly read, and add further read commands if necessary.

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-1

Appendix

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9

9

9-1

Appendix

Function directory

9.1 Function directory The functions marked with * are only available on the USM 35X DAC / USM 35X S (DAC evaluation mode), those market with ** are exclusively available on the USM 35X S (DGS evaluation mode). Function

Function group

Description

aLOGIC

aGAT

Evaluation logic of the gate A

AMPLCOR**

DGS

Amplitude correction

ANAMOD

CFG2

Setting of the analog output

ANGLE

TRIG

Entry of the angle for calculating the (reduced) projection distance (angle-beam probes)

A-SCAN

MEAS

Settings of the A-scan

aSTART

aGAT

Starting point of the gate A

aTHRSH

aGAT

Threshold of the gate A

ATTEN

DGS

Sound attenuation in the test piece

9-2

Function

Function group

ATT-REF**

DGS

Sound attenuation in the reference block

ATT-OBJ**

DGS

Sound attenuation in the test object

aWIDTH

aGAT

Width of the gate A

BAUD-R

CFG1

Baud rate for serial port transmission

bLOGIC

bGAT

Evaluation logic in the gate B

BOLDLI

JDAC

Selection and emphasizing of registration curve

bSTART

bGAT

Starting point of the gate B

bTHRSH

bGAT


bWIDTH

bGAT

Width of the gate B

CAL

CAL

Semiautomatic calibration

COLOR

TRIG

Marking of legs

COMMENT

DATA

Comment

Issue 01, 04/2005

Description

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix

Function directory

9.1 Function directory The functions marked with * are only available on the USM 35X DAC / USM 35X S (DAC evaluation mode), those market with ** are exclusively available on the USM 35X S (DGS evaluation mode). Function

Function group

Description

aLOGIC

aGAT

Evaluation logic of the gate A

AMPLCOR**

DGS

Amplitude correction

ANAMOD

CFG2

Setting of the analog output

ANGLE

TRIG

Entry of the angle for calculating the (reduced) projection distance (angle-beam probes)

A-SCAN

MEAS

Settings of the A-scan

aSTART

aGAT

Starting point of the gate A

aTHRSH

aGAT

Threshold of the gate A

ATTEN

DGS

Sound attenuation in the test piece

9-2

Function

Function group

ATT-REF**

DGS

Sound attenuation in the reference block

ATT-OBJ**

DGS

Sound attenuation in the test object

aWIDTH

aGAT

Width of the gate A

BAUD-R

CFG1

Baud rate for serial port transmission

bLOGIC

bGAT

Evaluation logic in the gate B

BOLDLI

JDAC

Selection and emphasizing of registration curve

bSTART

bGAT


bTHRSH

bGAT


bWIDTH

bGAT

Width of the gate B

CAL

CAL

Semiautomatic calibration

COLOR

TRIG

Marking of legs

COMMENT

DATA

Comment

Issue 01, 04/2005

Description

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix

Function directory Function

Function group

Description

Function

COPYMOD

CFG1

Assignment of the

key

DACECHO*

DAC/JDAC

Recording of a reference echo for the DAC

Function group

Description

DGS-CRV**

DGS

Recording curve for DGS evaluation mode

DGSMENU**

DGS

Activating/Deactivating the DGS menu table for selecting the probe and further DGS settings

DACMODE*

DAC/JDAC

Activating/Deactivating the DAC

DAMPING

PULS

Damping of the probe’s oscillating circuit

DGSMODE**

DGS

Activating/Deactivating DGS evaluation mode

DATE

CFG2

Current date

DGS-REF**

DGS

Recording of DGS reference echo

dBSTEP

RECV

User-programmable gain step DIALOG

CFG1

Selecting the language

D-DELAY

BASE

Setting of the display start DIAMET

TRIG

D eff**

DGS

Effective element diameter of the probe used

Change between plane-parallel and circular curved test components

DELALL

MEM

Deleting all stored data sets

DIR

DATA

Dataset directory

DELETE

MEM

Deleting a stored data set

DUAL

PULS

Separation of pulser and receiver

DEL-VEL**

DGS

Material velocity for probe delay EVAMOD

CFG2

Switchover REF – DAC – DGS – JDAC

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-3

Appendix


Function group

Description

Function

COPYMOD

CFG1

Assignment of the

key

DACECHO*

DAC/JDAC

Recording of a reference echo for the DAC

Function group

Description

DGS-CRV**

DGS

Recording curve for DGS evaluation mode

DGSMENU**

DGS

Activating/Deactivating the DGS menu table for selecting the probe and further DGS settings

DACMODE*

DAC/JDAC

Activating/Deactivating the DAC

DAMPING

PULS

Damping of the probe’s oscillating circuit

DGSMODE**

DGS

Activating/Deactivating DGS evaluation mode

DATE

CFG2

Current date

DGS-REF**

DGS

Recording of DGS reference echo

dBSTEP

RECV

User-programmable gain step DIALOG

CFG1

Selecting the language

D-DELAY

BASE

Setting of the display start DIAMET

TRIG

D eff**

DGS

Effective element diameter of the probe used

Change between plane-parallel and circular curved test components

DELALL

MEM

Deleting all stored data sets

DIR

DATA

Dataset directory

DELETE

MEM

Deleting a stored data set

DUAL

PULS

Separation of pulser and receiver

DEL-VEL**

DGS

Material velocity for probe delay EVAMOD

CFG2

Switchover REF – DAC – DGS – JDAC

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-3

Appendix Function

Function directory

Function group

Description

Function

Function group

Description


MSEL

Selection of measured values at four positions of the measurment line

MTLVEL

BASE

Setting of the material sound velocity

OBJECT

DATA

Object description

OFFSET*

DAC/JDAC

Offset for multiple DAC

OPERAT

DATA

Name of the operator

FILLED

LCD

Selecting the echo display mode (filled or normal)

FINE G

RECV

Fine adjustment of gain within a range of approx. 4 dB in 40 steps

FLAWLEN

DATA

Flawlength

FREQU

RECV

Selecting the frequency range for the connected probe

GAIN

left-hand rotary knob

Setting of the gain

HORN

CFG2

Switching the acoustic alarm signal on/off

P-DELAY

BASE

Compensating for the probe delay line

INDICA

AWS

Flaw gain in dB for AWS evaluation

POWER

PULS

Setting the power of the initial pulse

LIGHT

LCD

Choice of lightning for the display

PRBFREQ**

DGS

Probe frequency

PRBNAME**

DGS

Probe name

MAGNIFY

MEAS

Gate spreading PREVIEW

DATA

Dataset preview with A-scan

9-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Function

Function directory

Function group

Description

Function

Function group

Description


MSEL

Selection of measured values at four positions of the measurment line

MTLVEL

BASE

Setting of the material sound velocity

OBJECT

DATA

Object description

OFFSET*

DAC/JDAC

Offset for multiple DAC

OPERAT

DATA

Name of the operator

FILLED

LCD

Selecting the echo display mode (filled or normal)

FINE G

RECV

Fine adjustment of gain within a range of approx. 4 dB in 40 steps

FLAWLEN

DATA

Flawlength

FREQU

RECV

Selecting the frequency range for the connected probe

GAIN

left-hand rotary knob

Setting of the gain

HORN

CFG2

Switching the acoustic alarm signal on/off

P-DELAY

BASE

Compensating for the probe delay line

INDICA

AWS

Flaw gain in dB for AWS evaluation

POWER

PULS

Setting the power of the initial pulse

LIGHT

LCD

Choice of lightning for the display

PRBFREQ**

DGS

Probe frequency

PRBNAME**

DGS

Probe name

MAGNIFY

MEAS

Gate spreading PREVIEW

DATA

Dataset preview with A-scan

9-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix


Function group

Description

Function

Function group

PRF-MOD

Description

PULS

Setting the pulse repetition frequency

REFRNCE

AWS

Reference gain in dB for AWS evaluation

PROBE-#**

DGS

Probe number

REFSIZE**

DGS

Size of the reference reflector

PRINTER

CFG1

Selecting the printer for the test report

REJECT

RECV

Suppression of unwanted or spurious echo indications

RANGE

BASE

Setting of the range in which the measurement is made.

SCALE

LCD

Choice of display mode for the measurement line

RATING

AWS

Flaw rating as dB value

SCHEME

LCD

Choice of a color scheme for the screen display

RECALL

MEM

Retrieving a stored data set S-DISP

MEAS

RECTIFY

RECV

Selection of rectification

Zoomed display of a selected parameter

REFECHO

REF

For storing a reference echo for the measurement of dB difference

SET-#

MEM

Number of the data set

SETTING

DATA

Display of a function list

REFECHO**

DGS

Type of the reference reflextor used

S-REF1 S-REF2

CAL

Reference echo 1 for calibration Reference echo 2 for calibration

REFMOD

REF

Activation of echo comparison

STO-INF

DATA

Saving the current additional information

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-5

Appendix


Function group

Description

Function

Function group

PRF-MOD

Description

PULS

Setting the pulse repetition frequency

REFRNCE

AWS

Reference gain in dB for AWS evaluation

PROBE-#**

DGS

Probe number

REFSIZE**

DGS

Size of the reference reflector

PRINTER

CFG1

Selecting the printer for the test report

REJECT

RECV

Suppression of unwanted or spurious echo indications

RANGE

BASE

Setting of the range in which the measurement is made.

SCALE

LCD

Choice of display mode for the measurement line

RATING

AWS

Flaw rating as dB value

SCHEME

LCD

Choice of a color scheme for the screen display

RECALL

MEM

Retrieving a stored data set S-DISP

MEAS

RECTIFY

RECV

Selection of rectification

Zoomed display of a selected parameter

REFECHO

REF

For storing a reference echo for the measurement of dB difference

SET-#

MEM

Number of the data set

SETTING

DATA

Display of a function list

REFECHO**

DGS

Type of the reference reflextor used

S-REF1 S-REF2

CAL

Reference echo 1 for calibration Reference echo 2 for calibration

REFMOD

REF

Activation of echo comparison

STO-INF

DATA

Saving the current additional information

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-5

Appendix Function

Function directory

Function group

Description

Function

Function group

X-VALUE

TRIG

Entry of the distance between probe index (sound exit point) and leading face of the angle-beam probe

Y-POS

DATA

Y-position coordinate

STORE

MEM

Saving the data set

SURFACE

DATA

Condition of surface

T-CORR*

DAC/AVG/ JDAC

Sensitivity correction, e.g. to compensate for transfer losses

TESTINF

DATA

Saving additional information

THICKNE

TRIG

Entry of workpiece thickness for calculation of real flaw depth

TIME

CFG2

Current time

TOF

MEAS

Selection of the measuring point for the gate

UNIT

CFG1

Selecting the unit of measurement mm or inch

VGA

LCD

Activating/Deactivating the VGA output

X-POS

DATA

X-position coordinate

9-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Description

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Function

Function directory

Function group

Description

Function

Function group

X-VALUE

TRIG

Entry of the distance between probe index (sound exit point) and leading face of the angle-beam probe

Y-POS

DATA

Y-position coordinate

STORE

MEM

Saving the data set

SURFACE

DATA

Condition of surface

T-CORR*

DAC/AVG/ JDAC

Sensitivity correction, e.g. to compensate for transfer losses

TESTINF

DATA

Saving additional information

THICKNE

TRIG

Entry of workpiece thickness for calculation of real flaw depth

TIME

CFG2

Current time

TOF

MEAS

Selection of the measuring point for the gate

UNIT

CFG1

Selecting the unit of measurement mm or inch

VGA

LCD

Activating/Deactivating the VGA output

X-POS

DATA

X-position coordinate

9-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Description

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix

EC declaration of conformity

9.2 EC declaration of conformity We declare that the USM 35X conforms to the following European directives: • 89/336EEC (Electromagnetic compatibility) The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the regulations of the directive 89/336EEC is proven by the observance of the standard specifications • EN 55011: 1998 Class A, Group 2 and • EN 61000-6-2: 1997 • EN 61000-6-4: 1997. The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the regulations of the directive 73/23/EEC, amended by the directive 93/68/EEC, is proven by the observance of the standard specification • EN 61010-1: 2001.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-7

Appendix

EC declaration of conformity

9.2 EC declaration of conformity We declare that the USM 35X conforms to the following European directives: • 89/336EEC (Electromagnetic compatibility) The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the regulations of the directive 89/336EEC is proven by the observance of the standard specifications • EN 55011: 1998 Class A, Group 2 and • EN 61000-6-2: 1997 • EN 61000-6-4: 1997. The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the regulations of the directive 73/23/EEC, amended by the directive 93/68/EEC, is proven by the observance of the standard specification • EN 61010-1: 2001.

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-7

Appendix

Manufacturer/Service addresses

9.3 Manufacturer/ Service addresses

If there is anything special that you would like to know about the use, handling, operation and specifications of the instruments, please contact your nearest GE Inspection Technologies representative or directly:

The Krautkramer USM 35X is manufactured by: GE Inspection Technologies GmbH GE Inspection Technologies GmbH Robert-Bosch-Str. 3 D – 50354 Hürth

Service-Center Robert-Bosch-Str. 3 D – 50354 Hürth

Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111 Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402

or:

The USM 35X is manufactured according to state-of-theart methods using high-quality components. Thorough in-process inspections or intermediate tests and a quality management system certified to DIN EN ISO 9001 ensure an optimum quality of conformance of the instrument.

Postfach 1363 D – 50330 Hürth Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111 Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402

Should you nevertheless detect an error on your instrument, switch the instrument off and remove the batteries. Inform your local GE Inspection Technologies Service indicating the error and describing it. Keep the shipping container for any repairs possibly required which cannot be made on the spot. 9-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Appendix

Krautkramer USM 35X


9.3 Manufacturer/ Service addresses

If there is anything special that you would like to know about the use, handling, operation and specifications of the instruments, please contact your nearest GE Inspection Technologies representative or directly:

The Krautkramer USM 35X is manufactured by: GE Inspection Technologies GmbH GE Inspection Technologies GmbH Robert-Bosch-Str. 3 D – 50354 Hürth

Service-Center Robert-Bosch-Str. 3 D – 50354 Hürth

Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111 Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402

or:

The USM 35X is manufactured according to state-of-theart methods using high-quality components. Thorough in-process inspections or intermediate tests and a quality management system certified to DIN EN ISO 9001 ensure an optimum quality of conformance of the instrument.

Postfach 1363 D – 50330 Hürth Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111 Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402

Should you nevertheless detect an error on your instrument, switch the instrument off and remove the batteries. Inform your local GE Inspection Technologies Service indicating the error and describing it. Keep the shipping container for any repairs possibly required which cannot be made on the spot. 9-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix


France

USA

GE Inspection Technologies Scs SAC Sans Souci 68, Chemin des Ormeaux F – 69760 Limonest

GE Inspection Technologies, LP 50 Industrial Park Road USA – Lewistown, PA 17044

Phone +33 47 - 217 92 20 Fax +33 47 - 847 56 98

Phone +1 717 - 242 03 27 Fax +1 717 - 242 26 06

Great Britain GE Inspection Technologies 892 Charter Avenue Canley GB – Coventry CV4 8AF Phone +44 845 - 130 - 3925 Fax +44 845 - 130 - 5775

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

Appendix


France

USA

GE Inspection Technologies Scs SAC Sans Souci 68, Chemin des Ormeaux F – 69760 Limonest

GE Inspection Technologies, LP 50 Industrial Park Road USA – Lewistown, PA 17044

Phone +33 47 - 217 92 20 Fax +33 47 - 847 56 98

9-9

Phone +1 717 - 242 03 27 Fax +1 717 - 242 26 06

Great Britain GE Inspection Technologies 892 Charter Avenue Canley GB – Coventry CV4 8AF Phone +44 845 - 130 - 3925 Fax +44 845 - 130 - 5775

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-9

Appendix

9.4 Spare parts list

Spare parts list

32

23

31

5

4 33 24

35 25

34

9-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix

9.4 Spare parts list

Spare parts list

32

23

31

5

4 33 24

35 25

34

9-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix

Spare parts list

10 11

38 54 2

53

30 3

Krautkramer USM 35X

6

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-11

Appendix

Spare parts list

10 11

38 54 2

53

30 3

Krautkramer USM 35X

6

Issue 01, 04/2005

9-11

Appendix

Spare parts list

1 21 27 51 20

26 28

7

9 36

52

8 22

29

9-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Appendix

Krautkramer USM 35X

Spare parts list

1 21 27 51 20

26 28

7

9 36

52

8 22

29

9-12

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

16

1 2

2

1

2

2

2

1

1

4

2

2

-

33

35

36

37

38

50

51

52

53

54

-

34

32

2 2

31

2

22

2

2

21

1

4

20

30

2

-

29

2

12

1

1

11

28

1

1

1

-

1

1

10

27

1

9

26

1

8

1

1

7

25

2

6

2

1

5

24

36162-3.220

PCB assembly USM 32 X L

1

4

2

36161-3.220

PCB assembly USM 32 X B+F

1

3

35258-2.380

Handle (Modification-Set complete)

Issue 01, 04/2005

Spare parts list

08.March.05 / Ant

18906-7.139

103120-7.137

14520-7.820

101067-7.232

100874-7.232

12326-7.139

36056-6.530

36071-6.070

35634-6.650

35629-6.640

34882-6.640

34994-6.640

18672-7.820

35301-6.640

34796-6.600

35633-6.600

35631-6.600

35622-6.600

35621-6.600

35612-6.600

35253-6.540

36059-6.630

34809-6.020

102044-6.020

102043-6.020

103138-6.020

06650-7.130

36070-3.180

36128-3.220

35636-3.180

35451-3.180

35635-3.180

35632-3.160

35593-3.120

36166-3.110

36165-3.190

36164-3.130

Blanking cap , BNC

Blanking cap , Lemo

Rubber foot

Converter

LCD-Display

Locking screw

Rotary position transducer

Sealing screw

Isolation foil

Clamp, upper

Clamp, lower

Sealing (Key pad)

Pressure devices

Holder for handle

Ratchet disk

Contact plate

Cover

Mounting bracket LCD inverter

Mounting bracket LCD

Mounting bracket

Handle

Rotatable knob

Spacer sleeve

Spacer (8 mm)

Spacer (14 mm)

Spacer (23 mm)

BNC-Connector

Cable Lemo - MicroCoax

PCB assembly USM 35 X Bat

Cable 2 pin LCD

Cable 5 pin Inverter

Flexible cable LCD

Contact spring, complete

Membrane keypad

Connector-Cover, complete

Battery cover, complete

(contains Pos. 11, 6 and 30)

Housing lower part, partly mounted

Remark

Krautkramer USM 35X

23

36160-3.220

PCB assembly USM 35 X

1

Id.-No.

36163-3.130

2

Description

1

Housing upper part, with sealing

#

1

Pos.

16 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 4 2 2

33 35 36 37 38 50 51 52 53 54 -

34

32

2 2

31

2

22

2

2

21

1

4

20

30

2

-

29

2

12

1

1

11

28

1

1

1

-

1

1

10

27

1

9

26

1

8

1

1

7

25

2

6

2

1

5

24

36162-3.220

PCB assembly USM 32 X L

1

4

2

36161-3.220

PCB assembly USM 32 X B+F

1

3

23

36160-3.220

PCB assembly USM 35 X

1

Id.-No.

35258-2.380

Handle (Modification-Set complete) 08.March.05 / Ant

18906-7.139

103120-7.137

14520-7.820

101067-7.232

100874-7.232

12326-7.139

36056-6.530

36071-6.070

35634-6.650

35629-6.640

34882-6.640

34994-6.640

18672-7.820

35301-6.640

34796-6.600

35633-6.600

35631-6.600

35622-6.600

35621-6.600

35612-6.600

35253-6.540

36059-6.630

34809-6.020

102044-6.020

102043-6.020

103138-6.020

06650-7.130

36070-3.180

36128-3.220

35636-3.180

35451-3.180

35635-3.180

35632-3.160

35593-3.120

36166-3.110

36165-3.190

36164-3.130

Blanking cap , BNC

Blanking cap , Lemo

Rubber foot

Converter

LCD-Display

Locking screw

Rotary position transducer

Sealing screw

Isolation foil

Clamp, upper

Clamp, lower

Sealing (Key pad)

Pressure devices

Holder for handle

Ratchet disk

Contact plate

Cover

Mounting bracket LCD inverter

Mounting bracket LCD

Mounting bracket

Handle

Rotatable knob

Spacer sleeve

Spacer (8 mm)

Spacer (14 mm)

Spacer (23 mm)

BNC-Connector

Cable Lemo - MicroCoax

PCB assembly USM 35 X Bat

Cable 2 pin LCD

Cable 5 pin Inverter

Flexible cable LCD

Contact spring, complete

Membrane keypad

Connector-Cover, complete

Battery cover, complete

(contains Pos. 11, 6 and 30)

Housing lower part, partly mounted

36163-3.130

2

Description

1

Housing upper part, with sealing

# 1

Pos.

Remark

Spare parts list

Appendix

9-13

Appendix

9-13

9-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

9-14

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Changes

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

10-1

Changes

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

10

10

10-1

Changes This chapter contains information about changes and additions made at short notice and not yet included in the operating manual. If none exist, the chapter remains blank.

10-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Changes This chapter contains information about changes and additions made at short notice and not yet included in the operating manual. If none exist, the chapter remains blank.

10-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-1

Index

Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

11

11

11-1

Index ANAMOD ................................................................ 5-57

A a trig Triggering by an interface echo ........................... 5-15 A-Scan Setting the A-scan .............................................. 5-48 Accessories ............................................................. 2-5 Additions ................................................................ 10-2 Addresses ................................................................ 9-8 Adjustment range Function directory ................................................. 9-2

ANGLE Angle of incidence .............................................. 5-32 Anticoincidence ...................................................... 5-15 aSTART .................................................................. 5-25 Starting point of gate A ....................................... 5-16 aTHRSH Threshold of gate A ............................................ 5-16 aWIDTH Width of gate A ................................................... 5-16

Adustment Coarse and fine ..................................................... 4-9

B

aGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14

Backlight ................................................................ 5-52

Alkaline batteries ...................................................... 7-4

BASE (function group) .............................................. 5-6

aLOGIC Evaluation logic gate A ....................................... 5-15

Basic settings ........................................................ 4-10

Alphanumerical entries ........................................... 8-14 Analog output ................................................. 5-57, 8-5

Batteries ................................................................... 1-2 Care ...................................................................... 7-3 Charging the NiCd batteries .................................. 7-3 BAUD-R .................................................................. 5-55

11-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index ANAMOD ................................................................ 5-57

A a trig Triggering by an interface echo ........................... 5-15 A-Scan Setting the A-scan .............................................. 5-48 Accessories ............................................................. 2-5 Additions ................................................................ 10-2 Addresses ................................................................ 9-8 Adjustment range Function directory ................................................. 9-2

ANGLE Angle of incidence .............................................. 5-32 Anticoincidence ...................................................... 5-15 aSTART .................................................................. 5-25 Starting point of gate A ....................................... 5-16 aTHRSH Threshold of gate A ............................................ 5-16 aWIDTH Width of gate A ................................................... 5-16

Adustment Coarse and fine ..................................................... 4-9

B

aGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14

Backlight ................................................................ 5-52

Alkaline batteries ...................................................... 7-4

BASE (function group) .............................................. 5-6

aLOGIC Evaluation logic gate A ....................................... 5-15

Basic settings ........................................................ 4-10

Alphanumerical entries ........................................... 8-14 Analog output ................................................. 5-57, 8-5

Batteries ................................................................... 1-2 Care ...................................................................... 7-3 Charging the NiCd batteries .................................. 7-3 BAUD-R .................................................................. 5-55

11-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index bGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14

Changes ................................................................. 10-1

bLOGIC Evaluation logic gate B ....................................... 5-15

Changing a function value ...................................... 8-14

BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) ................. 5-70 bSTART Starting point of gate B ....................................... 5-16 bTHRSH Threshold of gate B ............................................ 5-16 bWIDTH Width of gate B ................................................... 5-16

Codes Codes for function keys ...................................... 8-26 Function codes ................................................... 8-17 Remote control ..................................................... 8-9 Coincidence ............................................................ 5-15 Configuration .......................................................... 5-53 For test applications ........................................... 5-43 Connecting a probe ................................................... 3-7 Controls .................................................................... 4-2

C

COPYMOD ....................................................... 6-3, 8-9 Assignment of the COPY key ............................. 5-55

CAL Semiautomatic calibration ......................... 5-19, 5-22 Calibration .............................................................. 5-17 Dual-element (TR) probes ................................... 5-21 Straight-beam probes .......................................... 5-18 With unknown materials ...................................... 5-19 CFG1 (function group) ............................................ 5-53 CFG2 (function group) ............................................ 5-53 Krautkramer USM 35X

D D-DELAY (Display starting point) ............................. 5-7 DAC (function group) .............................................. 5-61 DACECHO Recording reference curve ........................ 5-63, 5-68

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-3

Index bGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14

Changes ................................................................. 10-1

bLOGIC Evaluation logic gate B ....................................... 5-15

Changing a function value ...................................... 8-14

BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) ................. 5-70 bSTART Starting point of gate B ....................................... 5-16 bTHRSH Threshold of gate B ............................................ 5-16 bWIDTH Width of gate B ................................................... 5-16

Codes Codes for function keys ...................................... 8-26 Function codes ................................................... 8-17 Remote control ..................................................... 8-9 Coincidence ............................................................ 5-15 Configuration .......................................................... 5-53 For test applications ........................................... 5-43 Connecting a probe ................................................... 3-7 Controls .................................................................... 4-2

C

COPYMOD ....................................................... 6-3, 8-9 Assignment of the COPY key ............................. 5-55

CAL Semiautomatic calibration ......................... 5-19, 5-22 Calibration .............................................................. 5-17 Dual-element (TR) probes ................................... 5-21 Straight-beam probes .......................................... 5-18 With unknown materials ...................................... 5-19 CFG1 (function group) ............................................ 5-53 CFG2 (function group) ............................................ 5-53 Krautkramer USM 35X

D D-DELAY (Display starting point) ............................. 5-7 DAC (function group) .............................................. 5-61 DACECHO Recording reference curve ........................ 5-63, 5-68

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-3

Index DACMOD Activating DAC according to JIS ........................ 5-67 Activating DAC/TCG ........................................... 5-62 DACMOD (Activating DAC) ................. 5-61, 5-66, 5-73 DAMPING (Probe matching) ..................................... 5-9 DATA (function group) ............................................. 5-38 Data exchange ......................................................... 8-8 Data saving ............................................................ 5-34 Data set Deleting ............................................................... 5-35 Deleting all .......................................................... 5-36 Management ....................................................... 5-38 Recalling ............................................................. 5-36 Storing ................................................................ 5-35 DATE Setting the gate .................................................. 5-56 dBCORR (Sensitivity correction) .................. 5-64, 5-70 DBSTEP ................................................................. 5-12

Deleting a reference echo ....................................... 5-27 Depth ...................................................................... 5-31 DGS evaluation (USM 35S) .................................... 5-71 DIALOG Selecting the language ....................................... 4-10 DIALOG (Selecting the language) .......................... 5-53 DIR Directory of stored data sets .............................. 5-38 DIR (Dataset directory) ........................................... 5-41 Display ..................................................................... 4-3 Display range ............................................................ 5-6 Display starting point ................................................ 5-7 Distance-amplitude curve ....................................... 5-61 according to JIS Z3060-2002 .............................. 5-66 Double assignment ................................................... 4-9 DUAL Pulser-receiver separation .................................. 5-10

Defects ..................................................................... 1-3

11-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index DACMOD Activating DAC according to JIS ........................ 5-67 Activating DAC/TCG ........................................... 5-62 DACMOD (Activating DAC) ................. 5-61, 5-66, 5-73 DAMPING (Probe matching) ..................................... 5-9 DATA (function group) ............................................. 5-38 Data exchange ......................................................... 8-8 Data saving ............................................................ 5-34 Data set Deleting ............................................................... 5-35 Deleting all .......................................................... 5-36 Management ....................................................... 5-38 Recalling ............................................................. 5-36 Storing ................................................................ 5-35 DATE Setting the gate .................................................. 5-56 dBCORR (Sensitivity correction) .................. 5-64, 5-70 DBSTEP ................................................................. 5-12

Deleting a reference echo ....................................... 5-27 Depth ...................................................................... 5-31 DGS evaluation (USM 35S) .................................... 5-71 DIALOG Selecting the language ....................................... 4-10 DIALOG (Selecting the language) .......................... 5-53 DIR Directory of stored data sets .............................. 5-38 DIR (Dataset directory) ........................................... 5-41 Display ..................................................................... 4-3 Display range ............................................................ 5-6 Display starting point ................................................ 5-7 Distance-amplitude curve ....................................... 5-61 according to JIS Z3060-2002 .............................. 5-66 Double assignment ................................................... 4-9 DUAL Pulser-receiver separation .................................. 5-10

Defects ..................................................................... 1-3

11-4

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index FREQU Frequency range ................................................. 5-13

E EC declaration .......................................................... 9-7 Echo display ........................................................... 5-51 Enlarged echo display ......................................... 5-59 Zoom mode ........................................................... 4-3 Enlarged display Measurement value .............................................. 4-5 Errors ........................................................................ 1-3 Evaluation logic of the gates .................................. 5-15

Frequency range ..................................................... 5-13 Function directory ..................................................... 9-2 Function groups ........................................ 4-4, 4-8, 5-3 Functions .................................................................. 4-4 Function directory ................................................. 9-2 Overview ............................................................... 5-2 Setting the functions ............................................. 4-9 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59

EVAMOD ................................................................ 5-58

G F FILLED Echo display ....................................................... 5-51

Gain .......................................................................... 5-5 Fine adjustment .................................................. 5-12 Incrementation ...................................................... 5-5

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ........................... 5-11

Gate setting ............................................................ 5-14

Flaw evaluation ......................................................... 1-6

Gates ...................................................................... 5-14 Starting point ...................................................... 5-16 Width .................................................................. 5-16

Flaw position calculation ........................................ 5-31 Freeze function ....................................................... 5-59 Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-5

Index FREQU Frequency range ................................................. 5-13

E EC declaration .......................................................... 9-7 Echo display ........................................................... 5-51 Enlarged echo display ......................................... 5-59 Zoom mode ........................................................... 4-3 Enlarged display Measurement value .............................................. 4-5 Errors ........................................................................ 1-3 Evaluation logic of the gates .................................. 5-15

Frequency range ..................................................... 5-13 Function directory ..................................................... 9-2 Function groups ........................................ 4-4, 4-8, 5-3 Functions .................................................................. 4-4 Function directory ................................................. 9-2 Overview ............................................................... 5-2 Setting the functions ............................................. 4-9 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59

EVAMOD ................................................................ 5-58

G F FILLED Echo display ....................................................... 5-51

Gain .......................................................................... 5-5 Fine adjustment .................................................. 5-12 Incrementation ...................................................... 5-5

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ........................... 5-11

Gate setting ............................................................ 5-14

Flaw evaluation ......................................................... 1-6

Gates ...................................................................... 5-14 Starting point ...................................................... 5-16 Width .................................................................. 5-16

Flaw position calculation ........................................ 5-31 Freeze function ....................................................... 5-59 Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-5

Index

H

K

HORN Acoustic alarm .................................................... 5-58

Keys ......................................................................... 4-6 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59

I

L

Instrument Care of the instrument .......................................... 7-2

Language ................................................................ 4-10

Instrument versions .................................................. 1-8 Intefaces RS 232 interface ................................................... 8-6 Interface echo ........................................................ 5-15 Interfaces I/O interface .......................................................... 8-4

LCD Color scheme ...................................................... 4-14 LCD (function group) ............................................... 5-50 Lemo socket ............................................................. 8-5 LIGHT LCD backlight ..................................................... 5-52 Limits ........................................................................ 1-5 Line ........................................................................... 4-5

J JDAC (function group) ............................................ 5-66

M MAGNIFY Gate spreading ................................................... 5-48

11-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

H

K

HORN Acoustic alarm .................................................... 5-58

Keys ......................................................................... 4-6 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59

I

L

Instrument Care of the instrument .......................................... 7-2

Language ................................................................ 4-10

Instrument versions .................................................. 1-8 Intefaces RS 232 interface ................................................... 8-6 Interface echo ........................................................ 5-15 Interfaces I/O interface .......................................................... 8-4

LCD Color scheme ...................................................... 4-14 LCD (function group) ............................................... 5-50 Lemo socket ............................................................. 8-5 LIGHT LCD backlight ..................................................... 5-52 Limits ........................................................................ 1-5 Line ........................................................................... 4-5

J JDAC (function group) ............................................ 5-66

M MAGNIFY Gate spreading ................................................... 5-48

11-6

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index Maintenance ............................................................. 7-5

Operator training ....................................................... 1-4

Manufacturer ............................................................ 9-8

Operator's controls ................................................... 4-2

MEAS-P1 to P4 ........................................................ 4-5 Measurement line ........................................... 4-5, 5-46 Configuration ....................................................... 5-49 Measuring ............................................................... 5-23 Measuring point ...................................................... 5-17 MEM (function group) ............................................. 5-34 MSEL (function group) ............................................ 5-49 MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ......................................... 5-7 Multiple DAC ................................................. 5-65, 5-70

P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................................ 5-8 Power supply ............................................................ 3-2 PREVIEW Dataset preview .................................................. 5-38 PRF-MOD Pulse repetition frequency .................................. 5-11 PRINTER Selecting the printer driver .................................. 5-55 Printer Preparing .............................................................. 6-2

O OFFSET Distance of multiple DAC .......................... 5-65, 5-70 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ............ 5-65, 5-70 Operating levels Overview ............................................................... 5-2 Krautkramer USM 35X

P

PRINTER (Printer for test report) ........................... 5-51 Printer connection .................................................... 8-8 Printing ..................................................................... 8-9 Printing data ............................................................. 6-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-7

Index Maintenance ............................................................. 7-5

Operator training ....................................................... 1-4

Manufacturer ............................................................ 9-8

Operator's controls ................................................... 4-2

MEAS-P1 to P4 ........................................................ 4-5 Measurement line ........................................... 4-5, 5-46 Configuration ....................................................... 5-49 Measuring ............................................................... 5-23 Measuring point ...................................................... 5-17 MEM (function group) ............................................. 5-34 MSEL (function group) ............................................ 5-49 MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ......................................... 5-7 Multiple DAC ................................................. 5-65, 5-70

P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................................ 5-8 Power supply ............................................................ 3-2 PREVIEW Dataset preview .................................................. 5-38 PRF-MOD Pulse repetition frequency .................................. 5-11 PRINTER Selecting the printer driver .................................. 5-55 Printer Preparing .............................................................. 6-2

O OFFSET Distance of multiple DAC .......................... 5-65, 5-70 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ............ 5-65, 5-70 Operating levels Overview ............................................................... 5-2 Krautkramer USM 35X

P

PRINTER (Printer for test report) ........................... 5-51 Printer connection .................................................... 8-8 Printing ..................................................................... 8-9 Printing data ............................................................. 6-2

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-7

Index Probe connection ...................................................... 3-7

Recycling .................................................................. 7-6

Probe delay .............................................................. 5-8

Reduced projection distance .................................. 5-31

Probe matching ........................................................ 5-9

REFECHO .............................................................. 5-25

Projection distance ................................................. 5-31

REFMOD ................................................................ 5-25

PULS (function group) .............................................. 5-9

Registration curve .................................................. 5-70

Pulse repetition frequency ...................................... 5-11

REJECT ................................................................. 5-12

Pulser adjustment .................................................... 5-9

Remote control ......................................................... 8-9

Pulser-receiver separation ...................................... 5-10

Reset ........................................................................ 3-8 Rotary knobs ............................................................ 4-6

R RANGE (Display range) ............................................ 5-6

S

Recalling a data set ................................................ 5-36

S-DISP ..................................................................... 4-5

Receiver adjustment ............................................... 5-11

S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ...................... 5-46

RECORD (Recording reference curve) ......... 5-62, 5-67

Safety information .................................................... 1-2

RECTIFY ................................................................ 5-13

SCALE ................................................................... 5-52

RECTIFY (Rectification) ......................................... 5-13

Screen ...................................................................... 4-3

RECV (function group) ............................................ 5-11

Semiautomatic calibration ............................ 5-19, 5-22

11-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index Probe connection ...................................................... 3-7

Recycling .................................................................. 7-6

Probe delay .............................................................. 5-8

Reduced projection distance .................................. 5-31

Probe matching ........................................................ 5-9

REFECHO .............................................................. 5-25

Projection distance ................................................. 5-31

REFMOD ................................................................ 5-25

PULS (function group) .............................................. 5-9

Registration curve .................................................. 5-70

Pulse repetition frequency ...................................... 5-11

REJECT ................................................................. 5-12

Pulser adjustment .................................................... 5-9

Remote control ......................................................... 8-9

Pulser-receiver separation ...................................... 5-10

Reset ........................................................................ 3-8 Rotary knobs ............................................................ 4-6

R RANGE (Display range) ............................................ 5-6

S

Recalling a data set ................................................ 5-36

S-DISP ..................................................................... 4-5

Receiver adjustment ............................................... 5-11

S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ...................... 5-46

RECORD (Recording reference curve) ......... 5-62, 5-67

Safety information .................................................... 1-2

RECTIFY ................................................................ 5-13

SCALE ................................................................... 5-52

RECTIFY (Rectification) ......................................... 5-13

Screen ...................................................................... 4-3

RECV (function group) ............................................ 5-11

Semiautomatic calibration ............................ 5-19, 5-22

11-8

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index In this manual ..................................................... 1-11 LED ..................................................................... 5-60 Status symbols ................................................... 5-60

Sensitivity correction .................................... 5-64, 5-70 Serial communication activation ............................... 8-8 Service ..................................................................... 9-8

Syntax .................................................................... 8-11

SETTING Function list ........................................................ 5-42 setting Function list ........................................................ 5-38 Setting of gain .......................................................... 4-8 Sound attenuation (DGS) ........................................ 5-78 Sound velocity .......................................................... 5-7

T T-CORR Sensitivity correction (DAC) ................................ 5-64 Sensitivity correction (JDAC) .............................. 5-70 Transfer correction (DGS) ................................... 5-78

Spare parts list ....................................................... 9-10

TCG ........................................................................ 5-62 Registration curve ............................................... 5-70

Standard package .................................................... 2-3

Temperature .............................................................. 1-6

Start-up .................................................................... 3-8

Test report ................................................................ 6-3

Storing a data set ................................................... 5-35

Test requirements ..................................................... 1-4

Sub-D socket ............................................................ 8-6

TESTINF Additional information for stored data sets ......... 5-38

SVEL1 (Fixed sound velocity) ................................ 5-47 Switching on/off ........................................................ 3-8

THICKNE Material thickness ............................................... 5-32

Symbols Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-9

Index In this manual ..................................................... 1-11 LED ..................................................................... 5-60 Status symbols ................................................... 5-60

Sensitivity correction .................................... 5-64, 5-70 Serial communication activation ............................... 8-8 Service ..................................................................... 9-8

Syntax .................................................................... 8-11

SETTING Function list ........................................................ 5-42 setting Function list ........................................................ 5-38 Setting of gain .......................................................... 4-8 Sound attenuation (DGS) ........................................ 5-78 Sound velocity .......................................................... 5-7

T T-CORR Sensitivity correction (DAC) ................................ 5-64 Sensitivity correction (JDAC) .............................. 5-70 Transfer correction (DGS) ................................... 5-78

Spare parts list ....................................................... 9-10

TCG ........................................................................ 5-62 Registration curve ............................................... 5-70

Standard package .................................................... 2-3

Temperature .............................................................. 1-6

Start-up .................................................................... 3-8

Test report ................................................................ 6-3

Storing a data set ................................................... 5-35

Test requirements ..................................................... 1-4

Sub-D socket ............................................................ 8-6

TESTINF Additional information for stored data sets ......... 5-38

SVEL1 (Fixed sound velocity) ................................ 5-47 Switching on/off ........................................................ 3-8

THICKNE Material thickness ............................................... 5-32

Symbols Krautkramer USM 35X

Issue 01, 04/2005

11-9

Index Threshold of the gates ............................................ 5-16

W

TIME Setting the time .................................................. 5-56

Wall thickness .......................................................... 1-6

TOF Selecting the measuring point ............................. 5-44

Waste disposal ......................................................... 7-6 Width of the gates .................................................. 5-16

Transfer correction (DGS) ....................................... 5-78 Transfer of datasets ................................................ 8-15

X

Transmission timing ................................................ 8-12

X-position ............................................................... 5-40

TRIG (function group) ............................................. 5-31

X-VALUE Of the probe ........................................................ 5-32

U Ultrasonic testing ...................................................... 1-3 UNIT Units of measurement ......................................... 5-54

Z Zoom mode .............................................................. 4-3

Units ....................................................................... 4-11

11-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Index Threshold of the gates ............................................ 5-16

W

TIME Setting the time .................................................. 5-56

Wall thickness .......................................................... 1-6

TOF Selecting the measuring point ............................. 5-44

Waste disposal ......................................................... 7-6 Width of the gates .................................................. 5-16

Transfer correction (DGS) ....................................... 5-78 Transfer of datasets ................................................ 8-15

X

Transmission timing ................................................ 8-12

X-position ............................................................... 5-40

TRIG (function group) ............................................. 5-31

X-VALUE Of the probe ........................................................ 5-32

U Ultrasonic testing ...................................................... 1-3 UNIT Units of measurement ......................................... 5-54

Z Zoom mode .............................................................. 4-3

Units ....................................................................... 4-11

11-10

Issue 01, 04/2005

Krautkramer USM 35X

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1

USM 35X USM 35X DAC USM 35X S

GE Inspection Technologies

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D - 1

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1

USM 35X USM 35X DAC USM 35X S


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D - 1

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1 Description

Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

» Spectrum

Comment

Spike pulse Picture: 1

» Spectrum

Picture: 2

» Spectrum

Picture: 3

» Spectrum

Picture: 4

» Damping

Ý

-

-

DUAL = off DAMPING = low DAMPING = high DUAL = on DAMPING = low DAMPING = high

-

POWER = low POWER = high

342 45 1000 50

» Capacity

pF

-

220 1000

» Pulse Repetition Frequency

Hz

20%

4-1000 20%

-

-

-

-

4 100

-

» Operating Modes

-

-

-

» Characteristics of Transmitter Pulse

-

-

-

-346

-315

-283

»» PRF Mode »» PRF step

Hz

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-2

Manual, automatically linked to range in 10 steps >1,5m <1,5m Single-, dual mode through 1000 Hz DAMPING = low POWER = high GE Inspection Technologies


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

Comment

Spike pulse

» Spectrum

Picture: 1

» Spectrum

Picture: 2

» Spectrum

Picture: 3

» Spectrum

Picture: 4

» Damping

Ý

-

-

DUAL = off DAMPING = low DAMPING = high DUAL = on DAMPING = low DAMPING = high

-

POWER = low POWER = high

342 45 1000 50

» Capacity

pF

-

220 1000

» Pulse Repetition Frequency

Hz

20%

4-1000 20%

-

-

-

-

4 100

-

-

-

-

»» PRF Mode »» PRF step

Hz

» Operating Modes » Characteristics of Transmitter Pulse »» Pulse voltage

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-2

Ó

V

-

-

-

-346

-315

-283

Manual, automatically linked to range in 10 steps >1,5m <1,5m Single-, dual mode through 1000 Hz DAMPING = low POWER = high GE Inspection Technologies


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

»» Pulse rise time

Ç

ns

8,19

9,64

11,08

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

120,4

133,7

147,1

»» Effective output impedance

Í

Ý

23

29

35

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

-238

-216

-195


Ç

ns

11,18

13,15

15,12

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

81,4

90,5

99,5


Í

Ý

21

26

31

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

-246

-224

-202


Ç

ns

5,33

6,27

7,21

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

34,3

38,1

41,9


Í

Ý

38

48

58

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

-153

-139

-125


Ç

ns

6,21

7,31

8,40

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

25,1

27,9

30,7


Í

Ý

24

30

36


Comment

1000 Hz DAMPING = high POWER = high

1000 Hz DAMPING = low POWER = low

1000 Hz DAMPING = high POWER = low

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-3


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max


Ç

ns

8,19

9,64

11,08

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

120,4

133,7

147,1


Í

Ý

23

29

35

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

-238

-216

-195


Ç

ns

11,18

13,15

15,12

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

81,4

90,5

99,5


Í

Ý

21

26

31

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

-246

-224

-202


Ç

ns

5,33

6,27

7,21

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

34,3

38,1

41,9


Í

Ý

38

48

58

»» Pulse voltage

Ó

V

-153

-139

-125


Ç

ns

6,21

7,31

8,40

»» Pulse duration

Æ

ns

25,1

27,9

30,7


Í

Ý

24

30

36


Comment

1000 Hz DAMPING = high POWER = high

1000 Hz DAMPING = low POWER = low

1000 Hz DAMPING = high POWER = low

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-3


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

Comment

Receiver » Amplifier » Setting Range

dB

-

110

-

»» Increments

dB

-

0,5 1 2 6 12

-

»» Attenuator uncal. range

dB

-

4

-

»» Accuracy of calibrated attenuator

dB

-2

0

2

»» Uncalibrated increments

dB

-

~0,1

-

-

-

-

MHz

-

0,2 - 20 -

(-3dB) 0,2 - 1 MHz Filter 4

» Amplifier Frequency »» Frequency spectrum (-3dB) »» Frequency ranges

MHz

-

-

-

»» Lower frequency range

¢

MHz

0,177

0,197

0,216

»» Upper frequency range

¡

MHz

1,138

1,265

1,391

»» Center frequency

¤

MHz

0,473

0,498

0,523

»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

0,962

1,069

1,175

»» Maximum frequency

£

MHz

0,394

0,526

0,657

dB

-

>110

-

»» Dynamic range »» Noise level

Ù

»» Gain for 80% SH »» Minimum input voltage

µ

nVÛ

1

-

80

dB

24,0

25,0

26,0

áVæ

60

90

120

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-4



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

» Setting Range

dB

-

110

-

»» Increments

dB

-

0,5 1 2 6 12

-

Comment

Receiver » Amplifier

»» Attenuator uncal. range

dB

-

4

-

»» Accuracy of calibrated attenuator

dB

-2

0

2

»» Uncalibrated increments

dB

-

~0,1

-

-

-

-

» Amplifier Frequency »» Frequency spectrum (-3dB)

MHz

-

0,2 - 20 -

(-3dB)

»» Frequency ranges

MHz

-

-

-

0,2 - 1 MHz Filter 4


¢

MHz

0,177

0,197

0,216


¡

MHz

1,138

1,265

1,391


¤

MHz

0,473

0,498

0,523

»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

0,962

1,069

1,175


£

MHz

0,394

0,526

0,657


dB

-

>110

-

Ù

nVÛ

1

-

80

dB

24,0

25,0

26,0

µ

áVæ

60

90

120


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-4



Dimension

Min

Average Max

¥

Væ

-

-

MHz

-

-

-


¢

MHz

0,352

0,391

0,430


¡

MHz

3,903

4,337

4,770


¤

MHz

1,237

1,302

1,367

»» Maximum input voltage

Symbol



»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

3,551

3,946

4,340


£

MHz

1,055

1,407

1,759

dB

23,5

24,5

25,5

»» Minimum input voltage

µ

áVæ

90

110

120


¥

Væ

-

-

40

»» Gain for 80% SH

»» Dynamic range

dB

-

>110

-

Ù

nVÛ

1

-

80

MHz

-

-

-


¢

MHz

0,676

0,752

0,827


¡

MHz

9,843

10,937

12,030


¤

MHz

2,723

2,867

3,010

»» Noise level »» Frequency ranges


»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

9,167

10,186

11,204


£

MHz

2,041

2,722

3,402

dB

24,0

25,0

26,0


µ

áVæ

130

165

200


¥

Væ

-

-

40

dB

-

>105

-


»» Dynamic range

Comment

40


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-5



Symbol

¥


Dimension

Min

Average Max

Væ

-

-

40

MHz

-

-

-



¢

MHz

0,352

0,391

0,430


¡

MHz

3,903

4,337

4,770


¤

MHz

1,237

1,302

1,367

»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

3,551

3,946

4,340


£

MHz

1,055

1,407

1,759

dB

23,5

24,5

25,5


µ

áVæ

90

110

120


¥

Væ

-

-

40

dB

-

>110

-


Ù


nVÛ

1

-

80

MHz

-

-

-



¢

MHz

0,676

0,752

0,827


¡

MHz

9,843

10,937

12,030


¤

MHz

2,723

2,867

3,010

»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

9,167

10,186

11,204


£

MHz

2,041

2,722

3,402

dB

24,0

25,0

26,0


µ

áVæ

130

165

200


¥

Væ

-

-

40

dB

-

>105

-

»» Dynamic range


Comment

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-5


Dimension

Min

Average Max

Ù

nVÛ

1

-

MHz

-

-

-


¢

MHz

1,875

2,083

2,291


¡

MHz

18,528

20,587

22,645


¤

MHz

6,220

6,548

6,875

»» Noise level

Symbol


Comment

80 2 - 20 MHz Filter 2

»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

16,653

18,504

20,354


£

MHz

9,072

12,096

15,120

dB

24,5

25,5

26,5


µ

áVæ

200

260

320


¥

Væ

-

-

40

dB

-

>100

-

nVÛ

1

-

80

ás

-

<5 us

-

1nF,125 Ohm,0,5-4MHz



Ù

»» Deadtime after transmitter pulse »» Receiver input impedance »»» Single probe (combined transmitter and receiver)

Single mode

»»» Rmax

¦

Ý

-

338

-

Rmax

»»» Rmin

¸

Ý

-

338

-

Rmin

»»» Cmax

ã

pf

-

52

-

Cmax

»»» Cmin

â

pf

-

52

-

Cmin

»»» Dual-probe (separate transmitter and receiver)

Dual mode

¦

Ý

-

511

-

¸

Ý

-

511

-

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-6



»» Noise level

Symbol

Ù


Dimension

Min

Average Max

nVÛ

1

-

80

MHz

-

-

-

Comment

2 - 20 MHz Filter 2


¢

MHz

1,875

2,083

2,291


¡

MHz

18,528

20,587

22,645


¤

MHz

6,220

6,548

6,875

»» Bandwidth

Ú

MHz

16,653

18,504

20,354


£

MHz

9,072

12,096

15,120

dB

24,5

25,5

26,5


µ

áVæ

200

260

320


¥

Væ

-

-

40

dB

-

>100

-


Ù

»» Deadtime after transmitter pulse

nVÛ

1

-

80

ás

-

<5 us

-

1nF,125 Ohm,0,5-4MHz

»» Receiver input impedance »»» Single probe (combined transmitter and receiver)

Single mode

»»» Rmax

¦

Ý

-

338

-

Rmax

»»» Rmin

¸

Ý

-

338

-

Rmin

»»» Cmax

ã

pf

-

52

-

Cmax

»»» Cmin

â

pf

-

52

-

Cmin

¦

Ý

-

511

-

¸

Ý

-

511

-

»»» Dual-probe (separate transmitter and receiver)

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-6

Dual mode



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

ã

pf

-

33

-

â

pf

-

33

-

-

-

-

»» Full Wave

-

yes

»» Negative Halfwave

-

yes

-

»» Positive Halfwave

-

yes

-

» Signal Mode

»» RF

yes

» Suppression »» Adjustable

%

Comment

To 50 mm steel

-

yes

-

-

1 - 80

-


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-7


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

ã

pf

-

33

-

â

pf

-

33

-

» Signal Mode

-

-

»» Full Wave

-

yes

»» Negative Halfwave

-

yes

-

»» Positive Halfwave

-

yes

-

-

yes

-

-

1 - 80

-

»» RF

yes

» Suppression »» Adjustable


%

Comment

To 50 mm steel

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-7


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

» Number of Gates

-

2

-

» Alarm logic

-

off, pos, neg, trigger

-

Comment

Monitor

for gate B (C)

» Start

mm

-

0 to 9999

-

» Width

mm

-

0,2 to 9999

-

» Threshold

%

-

10 - 90 -

-

flank, peak jflank

-

» Measurement points

JIS Z3060

» Magnifier

-

yes

-

» Alarm

-

LED, horn

-

» Interface echo start

-

yes

-

» Switch output

-

yes

-

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-8

Display of A-scan on full screen width Horn switchable Control of Gate B by Gate A See interfaces



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

» Number of Gates

-

2

-

» Alarm logic

-

off, pos, neg, trigger

-

Comment

Monitor

for gate B (C)

» Start

mm

-

0 to 9999

-

» Width

mm

-

0,2 to 9999

-

» Threshold

%

-

10 - 90 -

» Measurement points

-

flank, peak jflank

-

» Magnifier

-

yes

-

» Alarm

-

LED, horn

-

» Interface echo start

-

yes

-

» Switch output

-

yes

-

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-8

JIS Z3060 Display of A-scan on full screen width Horn switchable Control of Gate B by Gate A See interfaces



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

-

active color-LCD

-

86 x 115 -

(HxW)

Display » Type » Dimensions of the Display

mm

» Resolution

-

240 x 320-

Number of pixels

» Backlight

-

yes

2 steps

-

» A-scan display »» Linearity of time base

%

-0,5

»» Sampling error

%

-2 -

-

-

»»» Amplitude

%

-2

0

2

Amplitude

»»» Position

%

-1

0

1

Position

-

-

-

»» Display jitter

» Measurement resolution

0,5 0

2

bei 2 MHz

»» Sound path

mm

0,01

-

1

0,01: 0 to 99 mm 0,1: 100 mm to 999 mm 1: ab 1000 mm

»» Amplitude

%

-

0,5

-

»»» ç

ns

-

100

-

ç

»»» è

ns

-

250

-

Following an interface echo

ç, è


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-9


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

active color-LCD

Comment

Display » Type » Dimensions of the Display

-

86 x 115 -

(HxW)

» Resolution

mm

-

240 x 320-

Number of pixels

» Backlight

-

yes

2 steps

-

» A-scan display »» Linearity of time base

%

-0,5

»» Sampling error

%

-2

0

2

-

-

-

»» Display jitter

0,5 bei 2 MHz

»»» Amplitude

%

-2

0

2

Amplitude

»»» Position

%

-1

0

1

Position

-

-

-

mm

0,01

-

1

%

-

0,5

-

» Measurement resolution »» Sound path

»» Amplitude

0,01: 0 to 99 mm 0,1: 100 mm to 999 mm 1: ab 1000 mm

ç, è »»» ç

ns

-

100

-

ç

»»» è

ns

-

250

-

Following an interface echo


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-9


Symbol

» Display width

Dimension

Min

Average Max

mm

-

0,5 to 9999

-

»» Fixed ranges

mm

-

55

-

»» Display start

mm

-

-10 to 900

-

»» Probe delay

ás

-

0 to 199,99

-

-

yes

-

-

1000 to 15000

-

-

mm, inch

-

0,5

0

0,5

-

-

-

»» Automatic Calibration » Material velocity

m/s

» Unit of measurement » Linearity of time base

%

» Trigonometry

Comment

Display start

2 step calibration Resulation 1m/s

»» Angle of incidence

°

-

0 - 90

-

Resulation 0,1

»»» Increments

°

-

0,1

-

Increments

»» X-value

mm

-

0 - 100 -

»» Object thickness

mm

-

1 - 9999 -

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-10

Distance: index point to probe front edge To calculate Sound Reflection



Dimension

Min

Average Max

mm

-

0,5 to 9999

-

»» Fixed ranges

mm

-

55

-

»» Display start

mm

-

-10 to 900

-

»» Probe delay

ás

-

0 to 199,99

-

-

yes

-

-

1000 to 15000

-

-

mm, inch

-

0,5

0

0,5

» Display width

Symbol

»» Automatic Calibration » Material velocity

m/s

» Unit of measurement » Linearity of time base

%

» Trigonometry

Comment

Display start

2 step calibration Resulation 1m/s

-

-

-

»» Angle of incidence

°

-

0 - 90

-

Resulation 0,1

»»» Increments

°

-

0,1

-

Increments

»» X-value

mm

-

0 - 100 -

»» Object thickness

mm

-

1 - 9999 -

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-10

Distance: index point to probe front edge To calculate Sound Reflection



Symbol

»» Diameter

Dimension

Min

mm/inch

» Image processing »» Readings to be displayed

Average Max

10 - 2000 flat 0,40 - 800 flat -

-

Comment

mm inch

-

-

5

-

»»» Time of flight

-

yes

-

»»» Sound path difference

-

B-A

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Surface distance

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Red. surface distance

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Depth position

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Amplitude in %

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Amplitude in dB

-

yes

--

»»» Amplitude in % curve

-

yes

-

»»» Amplitude as ERS

-

yes

-

»»» Alarm

-

yes

-

to gate threshold to reference (REF) for USM 35X DAC/S to reference curve * Only USM 35X DAC and S for gate A,B to reference curve * Only USM 35X S for gate A For Gate A,B

»»» Evaluation curve (DGS)

-

yes

-

* only for USM 35X S

»»» Test sensitivity

-

yes

-



For Gate A, B

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-11


»» Diameter » Image processing »» Readings to be displayed

Symbol

Dimension

Min

mm/inch

Average Max

10 - 2000 flat 0,40 - 800 flat -

-

-

-

5

-

Comment

mm inch


-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Sound path difference

-

B-A

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Surface distance

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Red. surface distance

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Depth position

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Amplitude in %

-

yes

-

For Gate A, B

»»» Amplitude in dB

-

yes

--

»»» Amplitude in % curve

-

yes

-

»»» Amplitude as ERS

-

yes

-

»»» Alarm

-

yes

-

to gate threshold to reference (REF) for USM 35X DAC/S to reference curve * Only USM 35X DAC and S for gate A,B to reference curve * Only USM 35X S for gate A For Gate A,B

»»» Evaluation curve (DGS)

-

yes

-


»»» Test sensitivity

-

yes

-



USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-11


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

»»» Number of legs

yes

»»» Flaw class

yes

addional possible change of A-scan color according to skips Flaw class

»»» db-difference to reference

yes

for DAC

yes

for DGS

»»» Reference gain Gr » Signal display mode

-

standard,filled

» Signal processing

-

-

-

»» Screen freeze

-

yes

-

Freeze

»» Auto freeze

-

yes

-

Auto freeze

»» A-scan Compare

-

yes

-

»» Echo dynamic

-

yes

-

Echo envelope

»» Peak Freeze » Zoom

-

yes

-

For Gate B

-

yes

-

A-scan on full screen width

» Status information

-

yes

-

» Dialog languages

-

20

-

» Function lock

-

yes

-

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-12

In zoom mode



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

»»» Number of legs

yes

»»» Flaw class

yes

addional possible change of A-scan color according to skips Flaw class

»»» db-difference to reference

yes

for DAC

»»» Reference gain Gr

yes

for DGS

» Signal display mode

-

standard,filled

» Signal processing

-

-

-

»» Screen freeze

-

yes

-

Freeze

»» Auto freeze

-

yes

-

Auto freeze

»» A-scan Compare

-

yes

-

»» Echo dynamic

-

yes

-

Echo envelope

»» Peak Freeze

-

yes

-

For Gate B

» Zoom

-

yes

-

A-scan on full screen width

» Status information

-

yes

-

» Dialog languages

-

20

-

» Function lock

-

yes

-

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-12

In zoom mode



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

Amplitude evaluation » DAC »» Number of reference echoes

-

»» Dynamic range

dB

»» Slope maximum

dB/ás

» DGS

-

yes

-

10

-

* Only USM 35X DAC and S Distance amplitude curve Reference echoes

40

-

For TCG

6

-

For TCG

-

yes

-

* Only USM 35X S

»» Number of probes

-

24

-

In memory

»» Free programmable probe

-

yes

-

One probe per data set

»» Reference reflectors

-

SDH BE FBH

-

»» Attenuation correction

-

yes

-

»» Transfer correction

-

yes

-

»» Quadrant correction

-

yes

-

-

yes

-

» DAC Mode »» Curve

-

yes

-

* Only USM 35X DAC and S display of curve Evaluation curve

»» TCG

-

yes

-

Depth compensation

-

4

-

-

0,1 - 14 -

»» Additional curves »» Curve offset

dB

»» JIS-DAC

Additional curves

yes


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-13


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

Amplitude evaluation » DAC

yes

»» Number of reference echoes »» Dynamic range

dB

»» Slope maximum

dB/ás

-

-

10

-

* Only USM 35X DAC and S Distance amplitude curve Reference echoes

-

40

-

For TCG

6

-

For TCG

-

yes

-

* Only USM 35X S

»» Number of probes

-

24

-

In memory

»» Free programmable probe

-

yes

-

One probe per data set

»» Reference reflectors

-

SDH BE FBH

-

» DGS

»» Attenuation correction

-

yes

-

»» Transfer correction

-

yes

-

»» Quadrant correction

-

yes

-

-

yes

-

»» Curve

-

yes

-

* Only USM 35X DAC and S display of curve Evaluation curve

»» TCG

-

yes

-

Depth compensation

»» Additional curves

-

4

-

-

0,1 - 14 -

» DAC Mode

»» Curve offset »» JIS-DAC


dB

Additional curves

yes

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-13


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

30

-

240

-

yes

-

»» Number of datasets

-

800

-

»» Contents of datasets

-

-

-

»» Dataset description

-

-

-

Comment

Data processing » Analog-to-Digital Conversion »» Sample frequency

MHz

» Storage of data

»» String Length (Dataset name)

-

24

-

»» Notes, No. of fields

-

9

-

»» Memo, No. of characters

-

24

-

»» Date and time

-

yes

-

»» Sound path (TOF)

-

yes

-

»» Trigiometric values

-

selectable-

»» Amplidute

-

selectable-

»» Hardcopy

-

yes

-

»» Function list

-

yes

-

»» Test Report

-

yes

-

From internal memory A-scan + instrument setup Numerical and alphanumerical 6 alphanumerical + 3 numerical

» Measurement results

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-14

For Gate A and B

Format PCX



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

MHz

30

-

240

Comment

Data processing » Analog-to-Digital Conversion »» Sample frequency » Storage of data

-

yes

-

»» Number of datasets

-

800

-

»» Contents of datasets

-

-

-

»» Dataset description

-

-

-

»» String Length (Dataset name)

-

24

-

»» Notes, No. of fields

-

9

-

»» Memo, No. of characters

-

24

-

»» Date and time

-

yes

-

»» Sound path (TOF)

-

yes

-

»» Trigiometric values

-

selectable-

»» Amplidute

-

selectable-

»» Hardcopy

-

yes

-

»» Function list

-

yes

-

»» Test Report

-

yes

-

From internal memory A-scan + instrument setup Numerical and alphanumerical 6 alphanumerical + 3 numerical

» Measurement results

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-14

For Gate A and B

Format PCX



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

»» Alarms

-

TTL

-

»» Horn

-

yes

-

Comment

Interfaces » Outputs

»» Alarm gate A/B »»» Switching voltage

U

V=

»»» Max. switching current

I

mA

-

-

yes

-

Logical OR

-

3

-

6

-

HCT level with 100 Ohm serial Max. switching current

»»» Hysteresis

%

0,5

0

0,5

Hysteresis

»»» Accuracy of the threshold

%

2

-

2

t

ms

20%

500

20%

Correspondig to actual threshold Hold time

»»» Amplitude Gate A or B

U

V=

-

0-5

-

»»» Time of flight Gate A or B

U

V=

-

0-5

-

»»» Max. switch current

mA

-

0,5

-

Corresponding to 100% SH Corresponding to gate width Max. switch current

»»» Output impedance

Ý

-

100

-

Output impedance

»»» Linearity

%

0,5

0

0,5

8 Bit +/- 1/2 LSB

»»» Rise time

V/ás

-

2,5

-

Rise time

»»» Fall time

V/ás

-

2,5

-

»»» Hold time

ms

-

8 - 250 -

»»» Hold time »» Analog output

Fall time Depending on PRF

» Digital input


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-15


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

Interfaces » Outputs

-

-

-

»» Alarms

-

TTL

-

»» Horn

-

yes

-

»» Alarm gate A/B

-

yes

-

Logical OR

-

3

-

6

-

HCT level with 100 Ohm serial Max. switching current

»»» Switching voltage

U

V=

»»» Max. switching current

I

mA

»»» Hysteresis

%

0,5

0

0,5

Hysteresis

»»» Accuracy of the threshold

%

2

-

2

t

ms

20%

500

20%

Correspondig to actual threshold Hold time

»»» Amplitude Gate A or B

U

V=

-

0-5

-

»»» Time of flight Gate A or B

U

V=

-

0-5

-

»»» Max. switch current

mA

-

0,5

-

»»» Output impedance

Ý

-

100

-

Output impedance

»»» Linearity

%

0,5

0

0,5

8 Bit +/- 1/2 LSB

»»» Rise time

V/ás

-

2,5

-

Rise time

»»» Fall time

V/ás

-

2,5

-

Fall time

»»» Hold time

ms

-

8 - 250 -

»»» Hold time »» Analog output

Corresponding to 100% SH Corresponding to gate width Max. switch current

Depending on PRF

» Digital input


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-15


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

-

yes

-

TTL

-

yes

-

RS-232

»»» Output/type

-

-

-

RS 232

»»» Driver

-

-

-


-

yes

-

Epson HP Seiko HP DeskJet 1200 HP LaserJet 1200 Redable about RS232 Time of flight

»»» Amplitude

-

yes

-

Amplitude

»»» Alarms

-

yes

-

Alarms

»» Control »»» Test data release » Digital interface »» Types »»» RS-232 »» Printer

»» Data

»»» A-Scan

yes

»» Trigger

-

» Remote control

-

» VGA output

A-Scan

TTL

-

-

-

RS 232

yes

»» Horizontal frequency

kHz

31,3

»» Vertical frequency

Hz

85

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-16



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

-

yes

-

TTL

-

yes

-

RS-232

»»» Output/type

-

-

-

RS 232

»»» Driver

-

-

-


-

yes

-

Epson HP Seiko HP DeskJet 1200 HP LaserJet 1200 Redable about RS232 Time of flight

»»» Amplitude

-

yes

-

Amplitude

»»» Alarms

-

yes

-

»» Control »»» Test data release » Digital interface »» Types »»» RS-232 »» Printer

»» Data

»»» A-Scan

yes

»» Trigger » Remote control » VGA output

-

TTL

-

-

-

-

RS 232

yes

»» Horizontal frequency

kHz

31,3

»» Vertical frequency

Hz

85

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-16

Alarms A-Scan



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

Comment

General » Instrument

-

»» Size (HxWxD)

mm

-

176 x 255- x 105

»» Weight

kg

-

2,2

-

incl. Batteries

»» Storage temperature

°C

-20

+60

»» Temperate range for mains operation

°C

0

40

»» Temperature range for battery operation

°C

0

»» Warm-up period

h

-

-

-

10 minutes at 25° C

-

-

-

Battery, mains (external power supply) Li Ionen Battery 6 NiCD, NiMH Cells

»» Possible power supplies

60

»» Voltage range for battery operation

V=

8,6 5,4

13 8

»» Voltage range with power supply

V=

9,5

13

»» Power consumption

VA

5,5

-

8

»» Low battery warning

-

yes

-

»» Environmental Protection

-

IP 66

--

»» Shock resistivity

-

-

-

Min (ECO) Max (FULL) Status display Shock resistance according to DIN IEC 68, 6 ms, 60g shocks per axis Vibration resistance according to DIN IEC 68, 1-150 Hz, 2g, 20 cycles per axis

»» Vibration


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-17


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

-

-

»» Size (HxWxD)

mm

-

176 x 255- x 105

»» Weight

kg

-

2,2

»» Storage temperature

°C

-20

+60

»» Temperate range for mains operation

°C

0

40

»» Temperature range for battery operation

°C

0

60

»» Warm-up period

h

-

-

-

10 minutes at 25° C

-

-

-

Battery, mains (external power supply) Li Ionen Battery 6 NiCD, NiMH Cells

General » Instrument

»» Possible power supplies

-

»» Voltage range for battery operation

V=

8,6 5,4

»» Voltage range with power supply

V=

9,5

»» Power consumption

VA

5,5

-

8

»» Low battery warning

-

yes

-

»» Environmental Protection

-

IP 66

--

»» Shock resistivity

-

-

-

»» Vibration


incl. Batteries

13 8 13

Min (ECO) Max (FULL) Status display Shock resistance according to DIN IEC 68, 6 ms, 60g shocks per axis Vibration resistance according to DIN IEC 68, 1-150 Hz, 2g, 20 cycles per axis USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-17


Symbol

Dimension

» Stability against temperature change

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

Comment

»» Amplitude

%/10° C

-5

0

5

»» Echo position

%/10° C

-1

0

1

-

-

-

»» Amplitude

%

-2

0

2

»» Time of flight

%

-1

0

1

-

-

-

-

14 3

-

-

-

-

After 30 minutes

-

-

-

Statussymbol

» Stability against voltage change

» Power supply »» Battery operation time

h

» Stability after warm-up time »» Low battery display

Li Ion Battery 6 NiMH cells Li Ion Battery 6 NiMH cells

»» Amplitude

%/10° C

-2

0

2

+/-0,5%

»» Time of flight

%

-1

0

1

+/- 0,5mm

»» Change in amplitude over time base position with battery c

%

-

-

-

-

Lemo, BNC

-

On order

» Types of Sockets »» Probe connection »» I/O interface

-

Lemo

-

8-pin

»» RS-232

-

DSUB

-

9-pin

»» External power supply

-

Lemo

-

» VGA output

Lemo

» Case

-

4-pin 10-pins

Plastic

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-18



Symbol

Dimension

» Stability against temperature change

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

»» Amplitude

%/10° C

-5

0

5

»» Echo position

%/10° C

-1

0

1

-

-

-

» Stability against voltage change »» Amplitude

%

-2

0

2

»» Time of flight

%

-1

0

1

-

-

-

-

14 3

-

-

-

-

» Power supply »» Battery operation time

h

» Stability after warm-up time »» Low battery display

Comment

Li Ion Battery 6 NiMH cells Li Ion Battery 6 NiMH cells After 30 minutes

-

-

-

Statussymbol

»» Amplitude

%/10° C

-2

0

2

+/-0,5%

»» Time of flight

%

-1

0

1

+/- 0,5mm

»» Change in amplitude over time base position with battery c

%

-

-

-

»» Probe connection

-

Lemo, BNC

-

On order

»» I/O interface

-

Lemo

-

8-pin

»» RS-232

-

DSUB

-

9-pin

»» External power supply

-

Lemo

-

4-pin

-

Plastic

» Types of Sockets

» VGA output » Case USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-18

Lemo

10-pins



Symbol

Dimension

» Documentation

Min

Average Max

-

-

-


Comment

Technical reference manual

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-19


» Documentation


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

-

-

-

Comment

Technical reference manual

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-19


Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

» Software update procedure

-

-

-

Download via RS 232

» Options

-

-

-

Data logger

Other

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-20



Symbol

Dimension

Min

Average Max

Comment

» Software update procedure

-

-

-

Download via RS 232

» Options

-

-

-

Data logger

Other

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-20


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1 Picture: 1


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-21



USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-21


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-22



USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-22




USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-23



USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-23


USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-24



USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-24


USM 35X Operating Manual

Recommend Documents